Home

ONKYO TX-NR1010

1. Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box Hama 01567 Leiko 01626 Pace 00847 00853 00887 Sat Industrie 01611 Hanseatic 01100 Lemon 01334 01175 01323 01356 SAT 01409 Hirschmann 00173 Lenoxx 01611 Dien E e Satplus 01100 Hitachi 01284 Linsar 01284 02211 02657 SatyCon 01631 Hornet 01300 Listo 01626 Pacific 01284 Schaub Lorenz 02418 HTS 00775 Lodos 01284 Palcom 01409 01611 Schneider 01206 01251 Humax 01377 01176 01427 Logik 01284 Panasat 00879 01433 Schwaiger 01334 01457 01631 01675 01808 01882 Macab 00853 Panasonic 00847 01304 01404 Sedea Electronique 01206 01626 0915 0214 02408 Manhattan 01300 03099 SEG 01251 01284 01626 ID Digital 01176 Maspro 00173 Panda 00173 Servimat 01611 ID Sat 01334 Matsui 00173 01284 01626 Pass 01567 ServiSat 01251 ILLUSION sat 01631 Maximum 01334 peeKTon 01457 02418 Shark 01631 donde 01195 01334 Mediabox 00853 Philips bei nn j x E Sherwood 01409 Indovision 00887 Mediacom 01206 Dod i Siemens en 01334 01626 mar TIT MediaSat 00853 m UT Dam TET Medion 01334 01626 Pus TE Sigmate 02418 MegaSat 01631 SKY 00099 00847 00887 Innova 00099 Pioneer 00853 01308 01175 01662 01693 inVion 02418 a 01611 018
2. Star 00887 UBC 00642 BskyB 01175 01662 Schneider 01206 Stream System 01300 UEC 00879 01356 Bush 01645 Sedea Electronique 01206 Strong 00853 00879 01284 United 01251 01626 02418 Canal Satellite 02657 SKY 01175 01662 01693 01300 01409 01626 Unitymedia 01882 Canal 02657 01850 02754 02418 Universum 00173 01251 CanalSat 02657 SKY Deutschland 102754 Sunny 01300 Variosat 00173 Cyfrowy Polsat 02527 SKY Italia 01693 01850 aci 00612 02418 Digifusion 01645 SKY New Zealand 02211 Supernova 09887 Vestel 01251 01284 DigiQuest 01300 SKY PerfecTV 02299 03099 nee ai Viasat 01195 DirecTV 01377 00099 20739 01662 Systec Vision 01626 Dish Network 00775 Skyplus 01175 01334 Sytech 021 Visiosat 01413 01457 Dishpro 00775 Smart 01631 TBoston ene Vitecom 01413 Dream Multimedia 01237 Sony 02299 0 Vivax 02418 Echostar 00775 02527 Stream System 01300 Technical 0162 Volcasat 02418 Edision 01631 Strong 01300 Testis Wavelength 01413 Expressvu 00775 Sunny 01300 Dos 01109 01135 Wharfedale 01284 Foxtel 01356 TechniSat 01195 Technosat 0120 Wisi 00173 Humax 01176 01427 01675 Technosat 01206 Techwood 01251 01284 01626 Worldsat 01251 01808 Telefonica 02527 TELE System 01251 01409 01611 Woxter 02418 ID Sat 01334 Telestar 01195 Telefonica 025
3. Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio Am rique du Nord uniquement Utilisation de la webradio Last fm Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio Pandora internet Radio Pour commencer tats Unis uniquement Pandora est un service de radio en ligne libre et personnalis vous permettant de lire la musique que vous connaissez et de d couvrir celle que vous aimez 1 Utilisez A V pour s lectionner I have a Pandora Account ou Pm new to Pandora puis appuyez sur ENTER Si vous ne connaissez pas Pandora s lectionnez I m new to Pandora Un code d activation apparaitra sur l cran de votre t l viseur Notez ce code Utilisez un ordinateur branch sur Internet et connectez le navigateur www pandora com onkyo Saisissez votre code d activation puis suivez les instructions pour cr er votre compte Pandora et vos stations webradio Pandora personnalis es Lorsque vous y tes invit s vous pouvez cr er vos stations en saisissant vos chansons et vos artistes pr f r s Apr s la cr ation de votre compte et de vos stations vous pouvez retourner votre r cepteur Onkyo et appuyez sur entr e pour couter votre webradio Pandora personnalis e Si vous disposez d un compte Pandora vous pouvez ajouter votre compte Pandora votre r cepteur Onkyo en s lectionnant I have a Pandora Account et y acc der en entrant votre adresse
4. Surround right back right Surround Surround Surround back left left Bi Screw type speaker terminals Strip 1 2 to 5 8 12 to 15 mm of insulation from the ends of the speaker cables and twist the bare wires tightly as shown B Banana Plugs North American models If you are using banana plugs tighten the speaker terminal before inserting the banana plug Do not insert the speaker code directly into the center 1 2 to 5 8 12 to 15 mm hole of the speaker terminal 1 A A EG gt A En13 Y 5 B 9 2 channel playback By adding an external amplifier to the 7 2 channel configuration you can enjoy 9 2 channel playback Connect your power amplifier s analog audio input jacks to the AV receiver s SB FH FW EXT AMP jacks with audio cables To use the SB FH FW EXT AMP jacks you must specify their channel with the Preout to External Amplifier setting gt page 64 You can set which speakers you want to use by priority See Selecting Speaker Layout page 52 1 SB Surround Back FH Front High FW Front Wide Power amplifier Surround back left Front high left Front wide left Surround back right Front high right Front wide right Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels The speaker terminals are color coded for identification purpose Speaker Color Front left Front high left Front wide left White Zone 2 left Zo
5. Television Television Television Television Akai 10178 10556 10037 Basic Line 10556 10037 10668 Casio 10037 Dick Smith 10698 10714 10715 10208 11037 Cathay 10037 Electronics 11675 10037 10195 10512 10037 Digatron 10037 Akiba 10037 Beaumark 10178 Centrum 11037 Digihome 11667 Akito 10037 Beijing 10208 Contanos 10037 Digiline 10037 10668 Akura 10171 10037 10714 Beko 10037 10714 10715 Changhong 10508 Digitek 11709 10668 11037 11363 11652 RT 11585 11667 11709 a5 Tm Chimei 11666 Digitor elson E ixi Alba 10037 10714 10668 Clarivox 10037 Dizi 10097 11037 11585 Belstat 11037 Classic 10499 DL 11363 Alien 11037 Beon 10037 Clatronic 10037 10714 11324 DMTech 12001 Allstar 10037 pani 10538 10898 Clayton 11037 Domeos 10668 Amstrad 10171 10037 11037 PR 10037 Condor 10037 Drean 10037 Anam 10037 Boxe Joss Conrowa 10698 DSE 10698 Anam National 10037 10650 nr 11037 Contec 10037 Dual 10037 11037 11585 2 Blac oly 10550 10037 10625 1 I Durabrand D 10171 10714 Blue Sky urabran A Anitech 10037 10714 10668 11037 CPTEC 10625 11363 11037 11652 Ansonic 10037 10668 10715 10499 11324 Crown 10037 10714 10668 j 11037 10715 10208 10037 10178 10625 11365 11363 11652 11709 s TUI 11817 13817 Ardem 10037 10714 Boca 11652 Dynatron 10037 Arena 10037 Boman 11324 Cyberpix 1166 Dynex 12049 Aristona 10556 10037 Bork 11363 SU 2027 Tu rd IS
6. LISTENING MODE 1 Use the input selector buttons to select the input source Start playback on the source component To adjust the volume use the MASTER VOLUME control Select a listening mode and enjoy QN Bi Screen Saver If there is no video signal on the current input source and no operation for a specific time three minutes by default a screen saver automatically comes on Tip The time until the screen saver activates itself can be changed in the Screen Saver setting page 79 The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is operated Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices Press USB or NET first RECEIVER SOURCE RTI 10 DIMMER SLEEP ONKYO RC 840M P Turning On amp Basic Operations TOP MENU This button displays the top menu for each media or service A V and ENTER These buttons navigate through the menus lt gt This button cycles through pages PLAYLIST lt gt In Standard Mode iPod iPhone this button selects playlists Ba This button starts playback lt lt This button selects the beginning of the current song Pressing this button twice selects the previous song 4 This button fast reverses the current song H This button pauses playback SEARCH You can toggle between the playback screen and the list screen during playback DISPLAY This button
7. 1 Press ACTIVITIES MY MOVIE MY TV or MY MUSIC to start the Easy macro command The default sequences of actions are described below To change the related source component see Changing the Source Components shown later in this chapter E MY MOVIE First the TV the Onkyo Blu ray Disc player and the AV receiver are turned on The input selector is set to BD DVD Finally the player starts playback 1 Depending on the start up time of your Blu ray Disc DVD player the AV receiver may not activate this playback command In this case press B on the remote controller E MY TV First the TV the cable set top box and the AV receiver are turned on Then the input selector is set to CBL SAT E MY MUSIC The Onkyo CD player and the AV receiver are turned on The input selector is set to TV CD Finally the player starts playback Note While the Easy Macro command is being processed you cannot use other ACTIVITIES If you want to operate other components first press ALL OFF and use the desired ACTIVITIES Turning Off the Components This button turns off all components activated by the Easy Macro mode 1 Press ALL OFF First the related components stop and turn off Second the AV receiver turns off Finally the TV turns off or enters standby mode 1 2 1 This step doesn t apply to MY MUSIC with the default settings 2 With some televisions the power may not be turned off or ente
8. vie experience that fully envelops the listener field adding height wide speakers to create a As well as music and movies video games natural immersive and spacious surround O Te can also benefit from the dramatic spatial soundscape ELITES effects and vivid imaging DTS Neo X Cinema SEL 32 5 21 72 If you re not using any surround back GE 3 2 5 2 7 2 WOOL Cl perme This mode is suitable for movie viewing 9 2 PLIx Movie PLIx Music PLIx Game speakers Dolby Pro Logic II will be used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby PLIIx Movie Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround Pro Logic movie e g TV DVD VHS Dolby PLIIx Music Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround Pro Logic music source e g CD radio cassette TV VHS DVD Dolby PLIIx Game Use this mode with video games especially those that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo IS 92 Neo X Music Neo X Game DTS Neo X Music This mode is suitable for any music source DTS Neo X Game This mode is suitable for video games N 2 5 Audyssey DSX 9 Audyssey DSX Dolby PLIIx Movie Dolby PLIIx Music These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx modes to expand 5 1 channel sources for 7 1 channel playback BE mio gt 4 PA 2 SB F 2 SB FW Dolby Pro Logic 112 Height PLIz Height Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed to more effectively use existing program material when heigh
9. the Late Night function for Dolby TrueHD sources is automatically fixed to Off When this setting is set to Off the Dialogue Normalization information is not available for Dolby TrueHD sources E Dolby Volume gt Off gt On Dolby Volume automatically adjusts the difference in volume levels which can occur between different contents or source components freeing the user from having to make volume adjustments Also by adjusting the frequency balance according to the playback volume it recreates the original source audio Dolby Volume therefore provides comfortable listening effectively controlling the volume level difference without unnatural changes in volume or sound quality to recreate the balance and nuance of the source audio Note When the Dolby Volume setting is set to On Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume will be set to Off If you would like to use Dolby Volume in THX listening modes set the Loudness Plus and Preserve THX Settings settings to Off and No respectively When Dolby Volume is set to On the Late Night function cannot be set E Volume Leveler gt Off gt Low Low Compression Mode activated gt Mid Medium Compression Mode activated gt High High Compression Mode activated This setting affects volume the most causing all sounds to be of equal loudness Volume Leveler maintains the perceived loudness of all co
10. Both the Resolution setting cannot be selected gt page 60 5 B Monitor Out set to Analog Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as shown with composite video and PC IN Analog RGB sources being upconverted for the component video output Use this setting if you connect the AV receiver s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT to your TV The composite video and component video outputs pass through their respective input signals as they are This signal flow also applies when the Resolution setting is set to Through gt page 60 Video Signal Flow Chart Blu ray Disc DVD player etc VV v y Composite PC IN Component HDMI Analog RGB AV receiver MONITOR OUT Composite Component HDMI Y TV projector etc 1 For details refer to Video Resolution Chart gt page 110 Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting When the Monitor Out setting is set to Analog page 60 if the Resolution setting is set to anything other than Through page 60 the video signal flow will be as shown here with composite video and PC IN Analog RGB sources being upconverted for the component video output The composite video and component video outputs pass through their respective analog input signals as they are HDMI input signals are not output Video Signal Flow Chart Blu ray Disc DVD player etc vv yy y Composite PC IN
11. L cran de lecture apparait 6 Vous pouvez contr lez les pistes avec les touches sur la t l commande Boutons activ s gt II W gt gt E El ments du menu Rate Song as Favorite Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur et d augmenter la probabilit que le morceau soit lu de nouveau Ban Song Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur et de diminuer la probabilit que le morceau soit lu de nouveau Ban Artist Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur et de diminuer la probabilit que les morceaux de cet artiste soient lus de nouveau Mark Favorite Permet d ajouter la station en cours de lecture vos favoris Unmark Favorite Permet de supprimer la station en cours de lecture de vos favoris Add song to Library Permet d ajouter la piste en cours de lecture votre biblioth que Delete song from Library Permet de supprimer la piste en cours de lecture de votre biblioth que Add to My Favorites Permet d ajouter une station ou un morceau la liste My Favorites Fre V Utilisation d une webradio Uso de Internet Radio Uso de Internet Radio Pandora Internet Radio Primeros pasos Uso de m ltiples cuentas El receptor de AV permite m ltiples cuentas de usuario solo EEUU rues sacra 2 Procedimientos comunes en el men lo que quiere decir que se puede cambiar libremente Internet Radio entre varios usuarios Despu s de registr
12. This section explains how to play music video files on the iPod iPhone Compatible iPod iPhone models Made for iPod touch 1st 2nd 3rd and 4th generation iPod classic iPod nano 2nd 3rd 4th 5th and 6th generation iPhone 4S iPhone 4 iPhone 3GS iPhone 3G iPhone 1 Press USB repeatedly to select the USB Front input Tip The same operation can be done by selecting USB in the Home menu 2 Connect the USB cable that comes with the iPod iPhone to the USB port on the front of the AV receiver While reading the contents of your iPod iPhone the message Connecting appears on the AV receiver s display The USB indicator lights It will flash if the AV receiver cannot read the iPod iPhone Tip When connecting your iPod iPhone with a USB cable we recommend you use an official USB cable from Apple Inc En28 Y 3 5 Turning On amp Basic Operations Press MODE repeatedly to switch to Extended Mode Music or Extended Mode Video A list of your iPod iPhone model s contents appears Tip If you want to operate using the iPod iPhone or the remote controller press MODE repeatedly to switch to Standard mode When you disconnect the iPod iPhone the AV receiver remembers the current mode This means that if you disconnect when in Extended Mode Music the AV receiver will start in Extended Mode Music the next time you connect the iPod iPhone Use A Y toselect a folder and then pres
13. Utilisation d une webradio Proc dures courantes dans le menu de webradio Remarque Les services disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de la r gion 1 Appuyez sur NET Une liste des services r seau s affiche et le t moin NET s allume S il clignote v rifiez que le c ble Ethernet est fermement branch sur l ampli tuner AV S lectionnez le service d sir et appuyez sur ENTER La page principale du service s lectionn s affiche Utilisation de plusieurs comptes L ampli tuner AV prend en charge plusieurs comptes utilisateur ce qui signifie que vous pouvez librement commuter entre plusieurs connexions Apr s avoir enregistr des comptes utilisateur l identification est r alis e partir de l cran Users 1 Appuyez sur MENU lorsque l cran Users est affich Les l ments de menu suivants s affichent Add new user Remove this user Vous pouvez soit stocker un nouveau compte utilisateur soit en supprimer un existant Conseil Certains des services ne permettent pas l utilisation de plusieurs comptes utilisateur Vous pouvez stocker jusqu 10 comptes utilisateur Pour commuter entre les comptes vous devez d abord vous d connecter du compte actuel puis vous reconnectez depuis l cran Users Fri V Utilisation d une webradio Pandora internet Radio Pour commencer tats Unis uniquement Utilisation de Rhapsody Etats Unis
14. gt CH A Red DISC A Red PREV CH B Green MENU B Green 43 RETURN C Yellow 43 RETURN C Yellow CLR D Blue CLR D Blue B VCR PVR operation B CD player CD recorder MD recorder operation Available buttons Available buttons GUIDE DISPLAY O a V lt gt Number 1 to 9 0 a V lt gt O SOURCE ENTER Number 10 ENTER MUTING SETUP DISPLAY SETUP CH II 44 gt gt OSOURCE I NI lt a gt gt PREV CH 14 44 gt MUTING 44 gt gt RETURN SEARCH DISC Number 1 to 9 0 CLR REPEAT CLR Number 10 RANDOM MODE E Cassette tape deck operation Available buttons Note 4 Reverse Playback Bl lt lt gt gt lt lt gt OSOURCE MUTING En V With some components certain buttons may not work as expected and some may not work at all See Controlling Your iPod iPhone about the operation of iPod iPhone page 89 1 The RIFLD function is not supported The RIFID supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control function of the HDMI standard 5 Learning Commands The AV receiver s remote controller can learn the commands of other remote controllers By transmitting for example the Play command from your CD player s remote controller the supplied remote controller can learn it and then reproduce the exact same command when its Be is pressed in
15. performed with just one button press Making Macros Each ACTIVITIES can store one macro and each macro can contain up to 32 commands RECEIVER SOURCE ZONE cs MY MOVIE MY TV MY MUSIC a RECEIVER 1 While holding down RECEIVER press and hold down MY MOVIE MY TV or MY MUSIC until MY MOVIE MY TV or MY MUSIC lights about 3 seconds 2 Press the buttons whose actions you want to program into the macro in the order you want them performed For the CD example above you would press the following buttons ORECEIVER TV CD gt 3 When you ve finished press ACTIVITIES again ACTIVITIES button flashes twice Tf you enter 32 commands the process will finish automatically Note MODE cannot be operated during the macro making process Once you assign new macro commands the previously registered macro will no longer work If you wish to retrieve it you will have to reassign the commands with the macro making Running Macros 1 Press MY MOVIE MY TV or MY MUSIC The commands in the macro are transmitted in the order in which they were programmed Keep the remote controller pointed at the AV receiver until all of the commands have been transmitted Macros can be run at any time regardless of the current remote controller mode Deleting Macros While holding down HOME press and hold down ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights about 3 seconds Press ALL OFF again ALL OFF flashes twice Note When Normal
16. 31070 31431 Star Clusters 31152 Windy Sam 30573 Pioneer 30142 32442 31516 31633 32180 Strato 31152 Xbox 30522 32083 Samsung 30199 33195 Sylvania 30675 Strong 30713 XLogic 31152 Sharp 32250 32474 32652 Targa 30741 Supervision 31152 Sherwood 33052 Toshiba 31639 32277 32551 17 y Ae DVD R TV DVD Combination Victor 31597 Magnavox 12372 Yamaha 30646 Matsui 11037 30713 Zenith 30741 Medion 12719 Nordmende 12001 HD DVD Odys 12719 Integra 32901 33104 33504 Panasonic 12170 LG 30741 Philips 11454 10556 11394 Microsoft 32083 30539 Onkyo 32901 33104 33504 Powerpoint 10698 Xbox 32083 Prosonic 12001 Pvision 12001 TV DVD Combination RCA 12746 12932 Akai 11675 Schaub Lorenz 12001 Black Diamond 11037 30713 SEG 11037 12719 30713 Blue Sky 11037 30713 Sharp 10818 Bush 11037 10698 12719 Soniq 12493 30713 Sunstech 12001 Centrum Sylvania 10171 11394 11864 Crown 11037 30713 11886 30630 30675 DMTech 12001 Teac 10698 Dual 11037 30713 Technica 11037 30713 Dynex 12049 Telefunken 10698 Elfunk 11037 30713 Teletech 11037 30713 Emerson 11394 11864 11886 Thomson 10625 3067 5 Toshiba 11524 Ferguson 11037 30713 United 11037 30713 Goodmans 11037 30713 Universum 30713 Grandin 30713 Vestel 11037 Grundig 30539 Viewsonic 12049
17. 4 Pulse ENTER Aparecer Please wait y despu s la pantalla Last fm Internet Radio Consejo Si desea utilizar m ltiples cuentas de usuario consulte Uso de m ltiples cuentas gt p gina 1 Se puede iniciar sesi n desde la pantalla Users 2 Utilice A Y para seleccionar un men y luego pulse ENTER Search Station Puede buscar emisoras por artista etiquetas o nombre de usuario Top Artists Station Puede reproducir canciones de los artistas mejor clasificados Top Tags Station Puede reproducir canciones con las etiquetas mejor clasificadas Personal Station Puede reproducir pistas de una emisora personalizada Your Library Your Neighbourhood y Your Recommendations Es5 V Uso de Internet Radio Profile Puede reproducir pistas de Recently Listened Tracks Library y Neighbours Account Info Confirme los datos de su cuenta Sign Out Se desconecta de su cuenta 3 Utilice A V para seleccionar una emisora y luego pulse ENTER o gt gt para iniciar la reproducci n Se inicia la reproducci n y aparece la pantalla de reproducci n E Elementos del men I Love this track Se guarda la informaci n sobre la canci n en el servidor de Last fm y aumenta la frecuencia con la que se reproduce Ban this track Se guarda la informaci n sobre la canci n en el servidor de Last fm y se reduce la frecuencia con la que se reproduce Add to My Favorit
18. 61 Monitor Out setting other than Analog and select in the HDMI Input setting to watch composite video and component video sources If your TV is connected to the COMPONENT 60 62 VIDEO MONITOR OUT or MONITOR OUT V set the Monitor Out setting to Analog and select in the Component Video Input to watch composite video sources If the video source is connected to a component video 19 62 input you must assign that input to an input selector and your TV must be connected to either the HDMI output or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT If the video source is connected to a composite video 19 input your TV must be connected to the HDMI output or the corresponding composite video output If the video source is connected to an HDMI input 18 61 you must assign that input to an input selector and your TV must be connected to the HDMI output While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected the 42 analog video circuitry is turned off and only video signals input through HDMI IN can be output On your TV make sure that the video input to which the AV receiver is connected is selected Bi There s no picture from a source connected to an HDMI IN Reliable operation with an HDMI to DVI adapter is 113 not guaranteed In addition video signals from a PC are not guaranteed When the Monitor Out setting is set to Analog 60 no video is output by the HDMI output
19. Dynamic EQ is set to On or Dynamic Volume is set to anything else than Off Dolby Volume will be switched to Off gt page 70 4 When the Monitor Out setting is set to Sub Video cannot be selected page 60 This setting cannot be used with the NET input selector 5 Only when you have selected Custom in the Picture Mode page 75 pressing ENTER allows you to adjust the following items via the Quick Setup Brightness Contrast Hue and Saturation Press RETURN to return to the Picture Mode setting 6 Depending on the input source and listening mode not all channels shown here output the sound 7 e This setting is not available in either of the following cases The Audio TV Out setting is set to On page 80 HDMI Control RIHD is set to On page 79 and you re listening through your TV speakers Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup You can change various audio settings from the Quick Setup gt page 54 Note These settings are not available in either of the following cases The Audio TV Out setting is set to On page 80 HDMI Control RIHD is set to On gt page 79 and you re listening through your TV speakers Sound Program E Sound Program Stereo Source 1 Stereo Source 2 Stereo Source 3 Multich Source 1 Multich Source 2 Multich Source 3 gt Off With this sett
20. For composite video and component video upconversion for the HDMI output the Monitor Out setting must be set to other than Analog page 60 and the HDMI Input setting must be set to See Connection Tips and Video Signal Path for more information on video signal flow and upconversion gt page 107 The assignment of input selector selected for Zone 2 cannot be changed when the Zone 2 HDMI is set to Use page 60 If no video component is connected to the HDMI input even if the HDMI input is assigned the AV receiver selects the video source based on the setting of Component Video Input When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as explained here the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority in the Digital Audio Input page 63 In this case if you want to use the coaxial or optical audio input make the appropriate selection in the Audio Selector setting page 77 Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV CD selector while HDMI Control RIHD is set to On page 79 otherwise appropriate CEC Consumer Electronics Control operation will not be guaranteed Ly To be continued Ae If you assign to an input selector that is currently selected in HDMI Through page 80 the HDMI Through setting will be automatically switched to Off AUX is used only for input from the front panel Component Video Input If you connect a video compo
21. Front Wide ZONE 2 L R Front High ZONE 3 L R Phones 1 6 3 9 Others Setup Mic 1 RS232 1 RI 1 USB 1 Front 1 Rear Ethernet 1 IR Input 1 IR Output 1 12 V Trigger Out 2 Specifications and features are subject to change without notice Appendix Memo En 119 V ley Q ONKYO Onkyo Sound amp Vision Corporation 2 1 Nisshin cho Neyagawa shi OSAKA 572 8540 JAPAN Tel 072 831 8023 Fax 072 831 8163 http www onkyo com Onkyo U S A Corporation 18 Park Way Upper Saddle River N J 07458 U S A Tel 800 229 1687 201 785 2600 Fax 201 785 2650 http www us onkyo com Onkyo Europe Electronics GmbH Liegnitzerstrasse 6 82194 Groebenzell GERMANY Tel 49 8142 4401 0 Fax 49 8142 4208 213 http www eu onkyo com Onkyo Europe Electronics GmbH UK Branch The Coach House 81A High Street Marlow Buckinghamshire SL7 1AB UK Tel 44 0 1628 473 350 Fax 44 0 1628 401 700 Onkyo China Limited Unit 1033 10 F Star House No 3 Salisbury Road Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2429 3118 Fax 852 2428 9039 http www onkyochina com Onkyo China PRC 1301 555 Tower No 555 West NanJin Road Jin an Shanghai China 200041 Tel 86 21 52131366 Fax 86 21 52130396 http www cn onkyo com SN 29401288EN C Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound amp Vision Corporation Japan All rights reserved Y1204 1 29401288 EN ONKYO Using Internet Radio Common Procedu
22. Remarque Surles canaux Rhapsody certaines touches ne fonctionnent pas E El ments du menu Add track to My Library Marquez les pistes en cours de lecture Add album to My Library Marquez les albums en cours de lecture Add playlist to My Library Marquez les listes de lecture en cours de lecture Add channel to My Channels Marquez les canaux de radio Rhapsody en cours de lecture Add to My Favorites Permet d ajouter une piste un canal ou une liste de lecture la liste My Favorites Conseil Vous pouvez supprimer des pistes des albums et des canaux Rhapsody marqu s de My Library Utilisation de Sirius XM Internet Radio Am rique du Nord uniquement Votre ampli tuner AV Onkyo comprend un essai gratuit de SiriusXM Internet Radio L cran Account Info affiche le nombre de jours restants dans votre essai Une fois la p riode d essai expir e si vous souhaitez continuer couter le service vous devez vous abonner Pour vous inscrire acc dez l adresse www siriusxm com internetradio l aide de votre ordinateur Lorsque vous vous inscrivez vous devez fournir un nom est un mot de passe utilisateur qui doivent tre saisis dans l ampli tuner AV Pour utiliser SiriusXM Internet Radio l ampli tuner AV doit tre connect Internet Suivez les tapes ci dessous l aide de la t l commande 1 Utilisez A Y pour s lectionner Sign In puis appuyez sur ENTER Si vous pos
23. Setup MainMenu Input Output Assign Monitor Out On the Monitor Out settings you can select whether or not to have the video sources images output through the HDMI output If you connect your TV to the HDMI output the Monitor Out setting is automatically set and composite video and component video sources are upconverted and output Composite video component video HDMI C IN Y CH Y 4 OUT Composite video HDMI component video If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT not the HDMI output Monitor Out setting is automatically set and composite video source is upconverted and output Composite video Component video C IN Y nv C OUT 2 Composite video Component video Note See Video Connection Formats gt page 107 for charts showing how the Monitor Out and Resolution settings affect the video signal flow through the AV receiver E Monitor Out gt Analog Select this if your TV is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT or MONITOR OUT V Main Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN gt Sub Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT SUB gt Both Select this if your TVs are connected to HDMI OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB Video signals are output from both HDMI outputs at the resolution supported by both TVs Changing the Monitor Out setting manually 1 Press MONITOR OUT on the
24. You can now play the music files in your Windows Media Player 12 library Tip On the Stream menu confirm that Allow remote control of my Player is checked Using Remote Playback 1 Turn on the AV receiver 2 Start Windows Media Player 12 To enable remote playback you must first configure Windows Media Player 12 3 On Windows Media Player 12 right click on a music file The right click menu appears Tip For selecting another media server select the desired media server from the Other Libraries menu on Windows Media Player 12 4 Select the AV receiver in Remote playback The Play to window appears and playback on the AV receiver starts Operations during remote playback can be made from the Play to window of Windows 7 on your personal computer A playback screen will be displayed on the connected TV En32 V Turning On amp Basic Operations 5 Adjusting the Volume You can adjust the volume by adjusting the volume bar in the Remote playback window The default maximum volume level is 82 0dB If you wish to change this enter the value from the Web Setup in your browser Refer to step 3 of Registering Other Internet Radio for details gt page 30 The volume value of the remote window and the volume value of the AV receiver may not always match Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV receiver will not be reflected in the Remote playback window Note Remote
25. and you re listening through your TV speakers Digital Processing Crossover Network is used gt page 67 Selecting Speaker Layout You can set which speakers you want to use by priority 1 Press RECEIVER followed by SP speaker layout repeatedly to select E 9 2 ch playback Important The following layouts are only available when the Preout to External Amplifier setting gt page 64 and all corresponding speakers are enabled gt Speaker Layout SB FH The sounds from surround back and front high speakers are output by priority gt Speaker Layout SB FW The sounds from surround back and front wide speakers are output by priority gt Speaker Layout FH FW The sounds from front high and front wide speakers are output by priority 87 2 ch playback gt Speaker Layout FH The sound from front high speakers is output by priority gt Speaker Layout FW The sound from front wide speakers is output by priority gt Speaker Layout S B The sound from surround back speakers is output by priority Note This setting is not available in either of the following cases The Speakers Type Front setting is set to Bi Amp or Digital Crossover The Powered Zone 2 3 setting is set to Yes and Zone 2 3 is turned on En52 Y Turning On amp Basic Operations Playback conditions may be limited depending on the set tings in Speaker Settings page 63 and Speaker Config
26. appropriate remote control code the AV receiver B The remote controller doesn t work To control another manufacturer s component point 91 Some versions of the iPod iPhone do not output the remote controller at that component video Before operating this unit be sure to press RECEIVER To control an Onkyo component that s connected via 92 Make sure that the batteries are installed with the 5 de point the ois controller atthe AV aoe mThe in rl contrelies doesnt correct polarity 5 to enter the appropriate remote control code contro my iPod iPhone irst Install new batteries Don t mix different types of 5 Make sure your iPod iPhone is properly inserted in To control an Onkyo component that s not connected 92 via RI point the remote controller at the component batteries or old and new batteries the Dock If your iPod iPhone is in a case it may not Make sure that the remote controller is not too far 5 B io enterth an t trol cod connect properly to the Dock Always remove your away from the AV receiver and that there s no a OnE Ue Ap PIO Piel ae Oe CON LODGE iPod iPhone from the case before inserting it into the obstruction between the remote controller and the AV Dock receiver s remote control sensor e ris HSE dd code may ud be correct The iPod iPhone cannot be operated while it s Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to ABA u a DA Rone displaying the Apple logo direct suns
27. compatible component is connected to the AV receiver via an HDMI cable the name of the connected component is displayed on the AV receiver display For example while you are watching TV broadcasting if you operate a Blu ray Disc DVD player being powered on with the remote control of the AV receiver the name of the Blu ray Disc DVD player will be displayed on the AV receiver Set it to Off when a connected piece of equipment is not compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment is compatible or not If operation is not normal when set to On change the setting to Off Refer to the connected component s instruction manual for details When the HDMI Control RIHD setting is set to On the power consumption on standby mode slightly increases Depending on the TV status the AV receiver will enter standby mode as usual The HDMI component connected to HDMI IN 1 2 3 AUX INPUT selected for Zone 2 cannot be operated with the remote controller through the AV receiver using RIHD function and also cannot be operated on the TV connected to HDMI OUT MAIN using CEC function The HDMI component connected to HDMI IN 1 2 3 AUX INPUT selected for Zone 2 can be operated on the TV in Zone 2 using CEC function When the source equipment is connected with the RI connection it may malfunction if HDMI Control RIHD is set to On B HDMI Through gt Off gt BD DVD CBL SAT STB DVR GAME1 GAME2 PC AUX TV
28. listening mode is selected E How do I change the language of a multiplex source Use the Multiplex setting in the Audio Adjust 68 menu to select Main or Sub Bi The RI functions don t work To use RI you must make an RI connection and an 22 analog audio connection RCA between the component and AV receiver even if they are connected digitally While Zone 2 3 is selected the fal functions don t 22 work E The functions System Off Auto Power On and Direct Change don t work for components connected via RI These functions don t work when Zone 2 3 is turned 22 on E When performing Automatic Speaker Setup the measurement fails and the message Ambient noise is too high is displayed This can be caused by a malfunction in your speaker unit Check if the unit produces normal sounds B The following settings can be made for the composite video inputs You must use the buttons on the unit to make these settings On the AV receiver press the input selector for the input source that you want to set and the SETUP button simultaneously While holding down the input selector button press SETUP until Video ATT On appears on the AV receiver s display Then release both buttons To turn the setting off repeat the above process so that Video ATT Off appears on the AV receiver s display and release the buttons Video Attenuation This setting can be made for the BD DVD CBL SAT ST
29. the listening mode will source optimizing the ambient and automatica y switen to TOCA us soun to produce the surround 2 a the audio channel signal contained in the source the corresponding speakers will output back channel output S BOUE THX Surr EX THX Ultra2 Mu 3 The AV receiver can input DSD signal from HDMI IN Depending on the player setting the This mode is designed for use with music output on the player side to PCM might bring better sound It expands 5 1 channel sources for 7 1 4 For the Blu ray Discs Dolby Digital is used in a 3 1 5 1 channel speaker system channel playback 5 DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver THX Ultra2 Games 6 If there are no surround back speakers DTS is used This mode is designed for use with video 7 Tf there are no surround back speakers Dolby Pro Logic II is used games It can expand 5 1 channel sources k DTS Neo X cannot be selected in the case of 192 kHz input signals for 6 1 7 1 channel playback THX Surround EX This mode expands 5 1 channel sources for 6 1 7 1 channel playback It s especially suited to Dolby Digital EX sources THX Surround EX also known as Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied Center speaker is connected Either the front high or front wide speakers are c
30. you must activate the Powered Zone 2 3 setting page 63 Main room Main room MA ZONE 3 R Advanced Operations Note With this setup the volume of Zone 2 3 is controlled by the AV receiver When Powered Zone 2 is used playback in the main room is reduced to 5 2 channels When Powered Zone 3 is used playback in the main room is reduced to 3 2 channels Connecting the Zone Speakers to an Additional Amplifier This setup allows 7 2 channel playback in your main listening room and 2 channel stereo playback in Zone 2 3 Main room O O O O O O Zone 2 U Ion R E J V Receiver integrated Zone 3 00 R L V o Receiver MES Q integrated amp Q Note The volume of Zone 2 3 must be set on the Zone 2 3 amplifier 12V Trigger Out When Zone 2 3 is turned on the output from the 12V TRIGGER OUT jack goes high 12 V and max 150 mA for Zone 2 12 V and max 25 mA for Zone 3 Connecting this jack to a 12 volt trigger input on a component in Zone 2 3 will make that component turn on or off as the AV receiver turns on or off the Zone 2 3 Zone 2 Video
31. you re for example using static IP you ll need to configure these settings yourself in which case a knowledge of Ethernet networking is essential What s DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is used by routers computers the AV receiver and other devices to automatically configure themselves on a network What s DNS Ens V Advanced Operations The DNS Domain Name System translates domain names into IP addresses For example when you enter a domain name such as www onkyousa com in your Web browser before accessing the site your browser uses DNS to translate this into an IP address in this case 63 148 251 142 MAC Address This is the AV receiver s MAC Media Access Control address This address cannot be changed B DHCP Enable Disable This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway and DNS Server settings Note f you select Disable you must configure the IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway and DNS Server settings yourself BIP Address gt Class A 10 0 0 0 to 10 255 255 255 Class B 172 16 0 0 to 172 31 255 255 Class C 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 255 Enter a static IP address provided by your Internet Service Provider ISP Most routers use Class C IP addresses E Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP typicall
32. 1 to 9 0 Q GUIDE Number 10 O a V lt gt DISPLAY ENTER MUTING SETUP CH I MI 9 gt gt PREV CH Hu gt gt 43 RETURN A Red CLR B Green C Yellow D Blue B Blu ray Disc HD DVD player operation Available buttons TOP MENU Number 1 to 9 0 4 1 4 gt Number 10 1 ENTER DISPLAY SETUP O SOURCE H lt lt gt gt MUTING 14 4 gt O O A Red DISC B Green MENU C Yellow 43 RETURN D Blue CLR Press the appropriate REMOTE MODE button first RECEIVER SOURCE ES o 9 ACINITIES m REMOTE MODE INPUT SELECTOR ED CD CD D gt c i i i i D INPUT TOP MENU e SPIGUIDE PREV CH f O PLAYLIST PLAYLIST M 4 43 04 E DVD player DVD recorder operation Controlling Other Components Bi Satellite receiver Cable receiver operation Available buttons Available buttons TOP MENU Number 1 to 9 0 GUIDE Number 1 to 9 0 kV Number 10 O 4 1 4 gt Number 10 ENTER DISPLAY ENTER DISPLAY SETUP O OSOURCE SETUP O OSOURCE I lt lt pp MUTING I BI lt lt gt gt MUTING 14 4 gt CH lt lt
33. 10556 10037 Sem TE Novita 11585 Panavision 10037 Mark 10037 10714 10715 Moms 10037 Nu Tec 10698 Panda 10698 10508 10208 Master s 10499 Morgan s 10037 O K Line 11037 11324 11636 Penne 10178 Mairo 10698 Moserbaer 11585 Oceanic 10208 Perdi T 10037 Masuda 10037 MTC 10512 Odys 12719 x A Perfekt 10037 Matsui 10556 10037 10714 MTlogic 10714 Okano 10037 10195 11037 10208 Petters 10037 11666 11667 Mudan 10208 OKI 11585 11667 gt Olevia 11610 12124 Philco 10178 10171 10037 Matsushita 10650 Multitec 10037 10668 11037 gt 11394 Maxent 11755 Multitech 10037 Ormi 10628 Philips 10178 10171 11454 Maxess 12493 Myrica 11666 Onei 11667 10556 10037 10512 Myryad 10556 Onida 10653 10605 10690 11394 7 Phocus 10714 11652 c Y Remote Control Codes Television Television Television Television Phoenix 10037 Reflex 10037 10668 11037 Sei Sinudyne 10037 SunBriteTV 11610 Phonola 10556 10037 Relisys 11585 Serie Dorada 10178 Sungoo 11248 Pioneer 10037 10698 10512 Remotec 10171 10037 Shanghai 10208 Sunny 10037 11457 11636 12171 Reoc 10714 Sharp 10650 10818 11165 Sunstar 10037 Plantron 10037 Revox 10037 11423 1165
34. 2ch Source With this setting you can specify the listening mode used when 2 channel 2 0 stereo digital sources such as Dolby Digital or DTS are played E Dolby D Dolby D Plus TrueHD With this setting you can specify the listening mode used when Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus format digital audio signals are played DVD etc Specifies the default listening mode for Dolby TrueHD sources such as Blu ray or HD DVD input via HDMI B DTS DTS ES DTS HD With this setting you can specify the listening mode used when DTS or DTS HD High Resolution format digital audio signals are played DVD LD CD etc Specifies the default listening mode for DTS HD Master Audio sources such as Blu ray or HD DVD input via HDMI Other Multich Source Specifies the default listening mode for multichannel PCM sources from HDMI IN such as DVD Audio and DSD multichannel sources such as Super Audio CD Miscellaneous LLC Miscellaneous Volume Setup E Volume Display Absolute Displayed range is Min 0 5 to 99 5 Max gt Relative THX Displayed range is codB 81 5dB to 18 0dB With this setting you can choose how the volume level is displayed The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value 0 dB Note If the absolute value is set to 82 82 0Ref will appear on the display and the THX indicator will flash B Muting Level b codB fully muted 50dB to 10dB in 10 dB steps This setting determines
35. 30646 Micromedia 30503 30539 Acoustic Solutions 30713 DigiLogig 3013 Inno Hit 30713 Micromega 30539 AEG 30675 Digix Media le Insignia 30741 30675 32428 Microsoft 30522 32083 AFK 31152 Disney 30675 32596 Minax 30713 Aiwa 30533 DSE 30675 31152 Integra 30503 30571 30627 Mitsubishi 30713 Akai 30675 Dual 30713 31612 31634 32147 Momitsu 33052 Alba 30539 30713 Durabrand 30675 30713 Trradio 30646 NAD 30741 ani D nc LI E sss Amstrad 30713 a 32855 Onkyo 30503 30627 31612 Anthem 32820 cBonch 31152 ET a 32147 30571 31634 Aristona 30539 30646 30713 TES Oppo 30575 32545 Elite 31152 ASDA 32213 Kenwood 30490 30534 Oron N Audix 30713 Emerson 30675 32213 Ormond 30713 Lenco 30713 33052 Autovox 30713 EuroLine 30675 Pacific 30713 Lexicon 32545 Awa 32587 Ferguson 30713 30741 31602 Palladium 30713 Basic Line 30713 Finlux 30741 um n 52 Panasonic 30503 30490 31579 Bel Canto Design 31571 Firstline 30713 iod ME 31641 32523 32710 Foehn amp Hirsch 33052 32859 Black Diamond 30713 0539 30741 32474 Funai 30675 Loewe 3 gt gt Pelican Accessories 30533 Blue Parade 30571 32783 Phil 30675 Blue Sky 30713 SE 30508 Logik 30713 Brandt 30503 Lumatron 30741 30713 30675 30713 31340 Bush 30713 31152 Lunatron 30741 31354 32056 32084 C Tech 31152 Go Video 30741 Ius 30573 32434 32689 California Audio Labs 30490 GoldStar 30741 Tamer 30713 Pioneer 30571 30142 30631 Cambridge Aud
36. Component HDMI Analog RGB AV receiver MONITOR OUT Component HDMI y y y Composite TV projector etc A En 108 Y Appendix B Signal Selection If signals are present at more than one input the inputs will be selected automatically in the following order of priority HDMI component video composite video However for component video only regardless of whether a component video signal is actually present if a component video input is assigned to the input selector that component video input will be selected And if no component video input is assigned to the input selector this will be interpreted as no component video signal being present In the Signal Selection Example shown below video signals are present at both the HDMI and composite video inputs However the HDMI signal is automatically selected as the source and the video is output by the HDMI output Signal Selection Example Blu ray Disc DVD player etc y Y y Composite Component HDMI AV receiver n UN a MONITOR OUT Component HDMI Y Y Y Composite TV projector etc Audio Connection Formats Audio components can be connected by using any of the following audio connection formats analog optical coaxial or HDMI When choosing a connection format bear in mind that the AV receiver does not convert digital input signals for analog line outputs and vice versa If signals ar
37. Components with HDMI Connecting Your Components Connecting the Antennas eee Connecting Onkyo RI Components Connecting the Power Turning On amp Basic Operations Turning On Off the AV 23 TUD DN ne Turning Off Initial Setup aieo dide Selecting the Language for the Onscreen Setup Menus Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Auto Setup Source Connection Remote Mode Sl ocio Network COMO asas Terminating the Initial Setup Playback 26 Playing the Connected Component 26 Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices 27 Understanding Icons on the Display Playing an iPod iPhone via USB Playing a USB Device cocer rr pb tee Listening to vTuner Internet Radio sa Registering Other Internet Radio Changing the Icon Layout on the Network Service Playing Music Files on a Server DLNA Remote Playback isos Playing Music Files a Shared Listening to AM FM Radio Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources 38 Using Basic Functions 2 0ns0nussunsennaneansaunnans
38. E Menu Items I like this song Give a song thumbs up and Pandora will play more music like it I don t like this song Give a song thumbs down and Pandora will ban that song from the current station Why is this song playing Discover some of the musical attributes that Pandora uses to create your personal radio stations Don t play the song for a month If you are tired of a song you can put the song to sleep and Pandora will not play it for one month Create station from this artist Creates a radio station from this artist A En2 V Using Internet Radio Delete this station This will permanently delete a station from your Pandora account All of your thumbs feedback will be lost should you choose to re create the station with the same song or artist Create station from this song Creates a radio station from this song Rename this station Lets you rename the current radio station Bookmark this artist Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for your profile on www pandora com Bookmark this song Pandora will bookmark the current song and allow you to buy them all from Amazon or iTunes in one step Add to My Favorites Adds a station to My Favorites list PANDORA internet radio PANDORA the PANDORA logo and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media Inc Used with permission Using Rhapsody U S only 1 Use A F to select Sign in
39. Finlux 01626 Philips 02294 Axitronic 01626 Dgtec 01242 01631 02418 Fly Com 01457 Scientific Atlanta 00858 02345 Balmet 01457 Dick Smith 02418 FMD 01413 01457 SFR 03107 Bell Express Vu 00775 Electronics Foxtel 00879 01176 01356 SingTel 01998 02802 Belson 02418 Digi Raum Electronics 01176 Freesat 02408 TeliaSonera 01385 Big Sat 01457 Digiality 01334 Fuba 00173 01251 Telus 02345 Black Diamond 01284 Digifusion 01645 Galaxis 00853 00879 Thomson 02769 Blaupunkt 00173 Digihome 01284 General Satellite 01176 Verizon 02378 Boshmann 01413 01631 DigiLogic 01284 Globo 01251 01334 01626 Boston 01251 DigiQuest 01300 01457 01631 GOI 00775 SSIS IE Boxer 01458 Digisky 01457 Gold Box 00853 Onkyo 52503 British Sky 00847 01175 01662 DigitalBox 01100 01631 Gold Vision 01631 HE Broadcasting Digiwave 01631 GoldMaster 01334 m EE BskyB 00847 01175 01662 DirecTV 01377 00099 Goodmans 01284 01291 Sky 01334 Bush ets 01291 01626 Dish Network 00775 Gradiente 00099 00887 Kanes SSH 01284 Canal Digital 00853 01334 Dishpro 00775 Grandin 01626 ADB 00642 00887 01259 Cansa ae ue DishTV 01300 Grocos 01409 01457 01626 men DRE 01176 Grundig 00847 00853 00173 d Dream Multimedia 01237 00879 01284 01291 Alba 01284 CanalSat 00853 02657 DSE 02280 02418 Haier 02418 an BM ae Deor DSTV 00879 00642 01433 Hallo 01626 y Remote Control Codes
40. Game console 9 c5 Set top box digital video recorder etc If your TV doesn t support Audio Return Channel ARC you need to connect an optical digital cable together with the HDMI cable to the AV receiver When listening to an HDMI component through the AV receiver set the HDMI component so that its video can be seen on the TV screen on the TV select the input of the HDMI component connected to the AV receiver If the TV power is off or the TV is set to another input source this may result in no sound from the AV receiver or the sound may be cut off Connect your components to the appropriate jacks The default input assignments are shown below Assignment can be changed gt page 61 Connections ETS Camcorder etc Tip To listen to the audio of a component connected via HDMI through your TV s speakers enable HDMI Through page 80 and set the AV receiver to standby mode Note n the case of Blu ray Disc DVD players if no sound is output despite following the above mentioned procedure set your Blu ray Disc DVD player s HDMI audio settings to PCM B Audio Return Channel ARC function The Audio Return Channel ARC function enables an HDMI capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI OUT MAIN on the AV receiver This function can be used when Your TV is ARC capable and The TV CD input selector is selected and
41. H amp B en Weltstar 11037 30713 Hanseatic 12001 Hitachi 11037 11667 30713 Insignia 12049 JVC 12271 LG 11423 Logik 11037 30713 Luxor 11037 30713 18 Remote Control Codes Remote Control Codes Memo Y AN Y1112 1 C Copyright 2012 ONKYO SOUND amp VISION CORPORATION Japan All rights reserved 29 4 0 1 0 9 4
42. HDMI Control RIHD is set to On page 79 and Jack Components Blu ray Disc DVD player v IN2 Satellite cable set top box etc v IN3 Set top box digital video recorder etc v IN4 Game console v INS Game console v IN6 Personal computer v IN7 Other components v INS Other components v Front Camcorder etc OUT MAIN TV OUT SUB Projector etc See also Connection Tips and Video Signal Path gt page 107 Using an RIHD compatible TV Player or Recorder 2 page 111 About HDMI gt page 113 A En s V Audio Return Channel is set to Auto page 80 B MHL Mobile High Definition Link With its support for MHL Mobile High Definition Link the AUX Front input allows you to deliver high definition video from a connected mobile device Ae Connections Connectin g Your Com ponents Connect your components to the appropriate jacks The default input assignments are shown below See Connection Tips and Video Signal Path for more The on screen menus appear only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN If your TV is connected to other information gt page 107 video outputs use the AV receiver s display when changing settings V Assignment can be changed gt page 62 63 No Jack Port Components 1 2 3 1 USB 1 2 iPod iPhone MP3 player USB flash drive 2 USB AUX INPUT iPod iPhone video VIDE
43. If the error persists please contact Onkyo Support and provide the error code Others Retry the update procedure from the beginning Tf the error persists please contact Onkyo Support and provide the error code Case 2 If an error occurs during the update process disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try again Onkyo Sound amp Vision Corporation 2 1 Nisshin cho Neyagawa shi OSAKA 572 8540 JAPAN http www onkyo com The Americas Onkyo U S A Corporation 18 Park Way Upper Saddle River N J 07458 U S A For Dealer Service Order and all other Business Inquiries Tel 201 785 2600 Fax 201 785 2650 Hours M F 9am 5pm ET http www us onkyo com For Product Support Team Only 1 800 229 1687 Hours M F 9am 8pm Sat Sun 10am 8pm ET http www us onkyo com Europe Onkyo Europe Electronics GmbH Liegnitzerstrasse 6 82194 Groebenzell GERMANY Tel 49 8142 4401 0 Fax 49 8142 4208 213 http www eu onkyo com China Hong Kong Onkyo China Limited Unit 1033 10 F Star House No 3 Salisbury Road Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2429 3118 Fax 852 2428 9039 http www onkyochina com Asia Oceania Middle East Africa Please contact an Onkyo distributor referring to Onkyo SUPPORT site http www intl onkyo com support firmware index html The above mentioned information is subject to change without prior notice Visit the Onkyo web site for the latest update A En 106
44. LPF will be 4000Hz and the tweeters HPF will be 2500Hz Tip Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover Network are played You can switch from the current audio source to test noises by pressing MODE D Blue n the case of usage of the bi amped speakers if there is a difference between the crossover frequency in the speakers built in network and the crossover frequency to be set on the AV receiver the frequency dip may be caused Therefore it is recommended that this function should be set to Yes B High Level Low Level gt 6 0dB to 0 0dB to 6 0dB in 0 5 dB steps With this setting you can set the volume of tweeters and woofers Tip Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover Network are played You can switch from the current audio source to test noises by pressing MODE D Blue B High Phase Low Phase de gt 180 With this setting you can adjust the phase of tweeters and woofers Tip Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover Network are played You can switch from the current audio source to test noises by pressing MODE D Blue B High Distance Low Distance gt Oinch 0 0cm to 12inch 30 0cm in 1 inch 2 5 cm steps With this setting you can adjust the virtual position of tweeter and woofer units Adjusting High Distance virtually shifts woofers behind tweeters Adjusting Low Distance virtually shifts tweeters behind woofers Dis
45. Last fm account today at www last fm join UK and Germany only Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad free Last fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without a computer Recommended Radio Discover smart personalised recommendations that adapt as your tastes change Artist Radio Pick any artist and we ll play you a whole station of music inspired by your choice My Library Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music you ve heard since you joined Last fm Tag Radio Polish funk Death pop Think of a style and we ll entertain you with it for hours Start your free trial straight away when you create your account and see for yourself what it s like to have the world s music at your fingertips Latest prices and full information are available at www last fm subscribe 1 Use A Y to select Sign in to your account and then press ENTER If you have the existing Last fm account you can sign in to your account to select Sign in to your account Enter your user name and password in the next keyboard screen E Using the keyboard screen 1 Use A Y 4 and the ENTER to enter your user name and password 2 Select OK 3 Press ENTER The Confirm your entries screen appears 4 Press ENTER Please wait appears and then Last fm Internet Radio screen appears Tip If you want to use multiple user accounts see Using Multiple Accounts page 1 Login can be made from the User
46. Menu gt page 1 1 2 Use A F to select Sign in to your account and then press ENTER Enter the e mail address and password you used when creating your account select OK and press ENTER The keyboard screen appears You can enter your user name and password from the remote controller or the buttons on the AV receiver If there are no mistakes in the information you have entered select OK and press ENTER An account information confirmation screen appears Tip If you want to use multiple user accounts see Using Multiple Accounts gt page 1 Login can be made from the Users screen Use A F to select the menu then press ENTER Music The place to find your Artists Albums and Playlists Shuffle Starts playing a random selection of tracks from your Locker Search Find a specific Album Artist or Song Account Info Your MP3tunes account information Sign Out Log out of your MP3tunes account The track at the top of the music list is automatically played back A En7 V Using Internet Radio 5 Use A F to select a track and press ENTER or gt to start playback A playback screen appears You can control the tracks with the buttons on the remote control Enabled buttons B II W lt lt gt gt E Menu Items Go to Menu Displays additional menu options You can view or change your MP3tunes account settings by going to www mp3tunes com account
47. Monitor Out is set to Sub gt page 60 Picture Adjust can be used when the USB input selector is selected however only when iPod iPhone is connected and Standard Mode or Extended Mode Video is selected 1 This procedure can also be performed on the remote controller by using the Quick Setup page 54 2 When a 3D video source is input Wide Mode is fixed to Full 3 When Metadata Compatible is enabled page 67 Picture Mode is fixed to Direct 4 When the Picture Mode setting is set to anything other than Custom this setting cannot be used 5 If the Resolution setting is set to 4K Upscaling gt pages 60 76 this setting is fixed at Off 6 Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value 7 When the Noise Reduction setting is set to anything other than Off this setting cannot be selected 8 With some TVs there may be no picture when this setting is set to 4K Upscaling 9 When Resolution is set to 1080p 24 or 4K Upscaling while Monitor Out is set to Analog the video is output in 10801 10 When Resolution is set to Auto while Monitor Out is set to Analog the video is output as Through Audio Selector Audio Selector gt ARC The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver With this selection the TV s audio can be automatically selected as a p
48. No Skip Skips this step and continues to Network Connection 2 When you re finished select one of the following options and press ENTER gt Yes Done The setup wizard continues to Network Connection gt No not yet You can enter other remote control codes Network Connection This step checks your network connection 1 Use A V to select one of the following options and then press ENTER gt Yes Performs the checkings gt No Skip Skips this step and terminates the initial setup A En25 V Turning On amp Basic Operations 2 Follow the instructions on screen to perform the network checking The checking is complete when the message Successfully connected appears at the middle of the screen Press ENTER to terminate the initial setup Tip If you have selected Wireless Option you need to configure the optional wireless adapter For further details see the instruction manual provided with the wireless adapter UWF 1 3 If an error message appears select one of the following options and press ENTER gt Retry Performs the checking again gt No Do it Later Skips this step and terminates the initial setup The setup wizard goes to Terminating the Initial Setup Terminating the Initial Setup This step ends the initial setup process 1 Press ENTER To restart the initial setup select Initial Setup in the Hardware Setup menu page 82 Playback T
49. Section FM Tuning Frequency Range North American 87 5 MHz 107 9 MHz European 87 5 MHz 108 0 MHz RDS AM Tuning Frequency Range 522 530 kHz 1611 1710 kHz Preset Channel 40 Digital Tuner North American HD Radio General Power Supply North American AC 120 V 60 Hz European AC 220 240 V 50 60 Hz North American 8 6 A European 850 W No sound Power Consumption North American 135 W European 120 W Stand by Power Consumption North American 0 10 W European 0 15 W Dimensions W x H x D 435 mm x 198 5 mm x 463 5 mm 17 1 8 x 7 13 16 x 18 1 4 Power Consumption Weight 23 0 kg 50 7 lbs B HDMI Input IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 INS IN 6 IN 7 IN 8 AUX INPUT Output OUT MAIN OUT SUB ZONE 2 OUT Video Resolution 1080p Audio Format Dolby TrueHD DTS HD Master Audio DVD Audio DSD Supported 3D Audio Return Channel DeepColor x v Color Lip Sync CEC RIHD HDMI ZONE 2 Bi Video Inputs Component IN 1 IN2 Composite BD DVD CBL SAT STB DVR GAME 1 AUX Analog RGB PCIN En 118 V Appendix E Video Outputs MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT Component Composite E Audio Inputs Digital Optical 2 Rear 1 Front Coaxial 3 Analog BD DVD CBL SAT STB DVR GAME 1 PC TV CD PHONO AUX E Audio Outputs Analog ZONE 2 LINE OUT ZONE 3 LINE OUT Analog Multichannel Pre Outputs 9 Subwoofer Pre Outputs 2 Speaker Outputs Main L R C SL SR SBL SBR
50. address on the Network screen Check the Network settings 81 USB Device Playback E Can t access the music files on a USB device Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly The AV receiver supports USB devices that support 115 the USB mass storage device class However playback may not be possible with some USB devices even if they conform to the USB mass storage device class USB memory devices with security functions cannot be played E Standby power consumption In the following cases the power consumption in 79 80 standby mode may reach up to a maximum of 81 12 5 W The HDMI Control RIHD setting is set to On Depending on the TV status the AV receiver will enter standby mode as usual The HDMI Through setting is set to other than Off The Network Standby setting is set to On En 101 V If an MHL enabled mobile device is connected to the 18 AUX front input the power consumption in standby mode will increase Bi The sound changes when connect my headphones When a pair of headphones is connected the listening mode is set to Stereo unless it s already set to Stereo Mono Direct or Pure Audio E The speaker distance cannot be set as required The values entered may be automatically adjusted with values best suited for your home theater E The display doesn t work The display is turned off when the Pure Audio
51. also called D Sub or D subminiature E Composite video Composite video is commonly used on TVs DVDs and other video equipment EA Yellow A En 17 V Connections E Optical digital audio Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital sound such as PCM 2 Dolby Digital or DTS The audio quality is the same as coaxial OPTICAL m E Coaxial digital audio Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital sound such as PCM 2 Dolby Digital or DTS The audio quality is the same as optical AX Orange COAXIAL E Analog audio RCA Analog audio connections RCA carry analog audio on L White Red 2 For PCM signals the supported sampling rates are 32 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz With HDMI connections 176 4 and 192 kHz are also supported Note The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs The AV receiver s optical digital jacks have shutter type covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and close when it s removed Push plugs in all the way To prevent shutter damage hold the optical plug straight when inserting and removing 5 Connecting Components with HDMI Satellite cable set top box etc Personal computer 9 FS 1 DWR 2 gt C TV projector etc san 1 DVD CHEN ooo Blu ray Disc DVD player
52. an RDS station that s broadcasting PS information the station s name will be displayed Pressing DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3 seconds RT Radio Text When tuned to an RDS station that s broadcasting text information the text will be shown on the AV receiver s display as described in the next section PTY Program Type This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by type TP Traffic Program This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that broadcast traffic information page 37 Ly To be continued 50 Note n some cases the text characters displayed on the AV receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the radio station Also unexpected characters may be displayed when unsupported characters are received This is not a malfunction If the signal from an RDS station is weak RDS data may be displayed intermittently or not at all E Displaying Radio Text RT 1 Press RT PTY TP once The RT information scrolls across the AV receiver s display Note The message Waiting may appear while the AV receiver waits for the RT information If the message No Text Data appears no RT information is available B Finding Stations by Type PTY You can search for radio stations by type 1 2 Press RT PTY TP twice The current program type appears on the AV receiver s display Use PRESET 4 gt to select the type of program you want See the table shown later in this c
53. and then press ENTER Audyssey MultEQ XT32 performs more measurements This takes a few minutes When prompted repeat step 7 O To be continued 9 Use A F to select an option and then press ENTER MultEQ XT32 Auto Setup 1 AUDYSSEY Review Speaker Configuration Subwoofer 2ch B Front 40Hz Center 40Hz la Surround 100Hz fl 8 gt Front Wide None Front High 100Hz Surround Back 120Hz a 3 2 Surround Back Ch 2ch g s Save Cancel The options are Save Save the calculated settings and exit Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup gt Cancel Cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup Tip You can view the calculated settings for the speaker configuration speaker distances and speaker levels by using lt gt 10 Use A V to select a target and use lt gt to change the setting After the results of Audyssey MultEQ XT32 have been saved the menu will display the Audyssey gt page 72 Dynamic EQ gt page 72 Dynamic Volume page 73 settings Note When Audyssey Quick Start has been used for measurement Audyssey cannot be selected These settings are applied to all input selectors 11 Press ENTER 1 2 Disconnect the speaker setup microphone Note You can cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup at any point in this procedure simply by disconnecting the setup microph
54. apparatus Don t put candles or other burning objects on top of this unit Batteries Always consider the environmental issues and follow local regulations when disposing of batteries If you install the apparatus in a built in installation such as a bookcase or rack ensure that there is adequate ventilation Leave 20 cm 8 of free space at the top and sides and 10 cm 4 at the rear The rear edge of the shelf or board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm 4 away from the rear panel or wall creating a flue like gap for warm air to escape Precautions 1 Recording Copyright Unless it s for personal use only recording copyrighted material is illegal without the permission of the copyright holder 2 AC Fuse The AC fuse inside the unit is not user serviceable If you cannot turn on the unit contact your Onkyo dealer 3 Care Occasionally you should dust the unit all over with a soft cloth For stubborn stains use a soft cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and water Dry the unit immediately afterwards with a clean cloth Don t use abrasive cloths thinners alcohol or other chemical solvents because they may damage the finish or remove the panel lettering 4 Power WARNING BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULLY AC outlet voltages vary from country to country Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the voltage requirements printed
55. be performed with fRIFLD connection The following components RIFLD compatible As of January 2012 BTV Toshiba TV Sharp TV E Players Recorders Onkyo and Integra f341IHID compatible players Toshiba players and recorders Sharp players and recorders only when used together with Sharp TV Models other than those mentioned above may have some interoperability if compatible with CEC which is part of the HDMI Standard but operation cannot be guaranteed Note For proper linked operations do not connect more f31IFLD compatible components than the quantities specified below to the HDMI input terminal Blu ray Disc DVD players up to three Blu ray Disc DVD recorders Digital Video Recorders up to three Cable Satellite Set top boxes up to four Do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver AV amplifier via HDMI Proper linked operations are not guaranteed when more RIHD compatible components than the above mentioned quantities are connected En 111 V E For RIFID compatible TV The following linked operations are enabled by connecting the AV receiver to an RIFLD compatible TV The AV receiver will enter standby mode when the TV is set to standby e You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either output the audio from the speakers connected to the AV receiver or from the speakers of the TV It is possible to output the audio coming from the tuner or au
56. be played depending on the server type E MP3 mp3 or MP3 MP3 files must be MPEG 1 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 format with sampling rates of 8 kHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps and 320 kbps Incompatible files cannot be played WMA wma WMA WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation Audio can be encoded in WMA format by using Windows Media Player WMA files must have the copyright option turned off Sampling rates of 8 kHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps and WMA DRM are supported WMA Pro Voice formats are not supported E WMA Lossless WMA Sampling rates of 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz are supported Quantization bit 16 bit 24 bit E WAV wav WAV WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio Sampling rates of 8 kHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 64 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported Quantization bit 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit E AAC aac m4a mp4 3gp 3g2 AAC M4A MP4 3GP or 3G2 AAC stands for MPEG 2 MPEG 4 Audio Sampling rates of 8 kHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 64 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kb
57. can change its remote ID from 1 to 2 or 3 Note If you do change the AV receiver s remote ID be sure to change the remote controller to the same ID see below otherwise you won t be able to control it with the remote controller Changing the remote controller s ID While holding down RECEIVER press and hold down Q SETUP until the RECEIVER lights about 3 seconds Use the number buttons to enter ID 1 2 or 3 RECEIVER flashes twice Remote Mode Setup See Looking up for Remote Control Codes gt page 90 En82 V Advanced Operations e Setup io LLC Lock Setup With this preference you can protect your settings by locking the setup menus 1 a gt B Setup gt Locked gt Unlocked When Locked is selected the setup menus will be locked and you cannot change any setting Multi Zone In addition to the main listening room you can also enjoy playback in the other room or as we call Multi Zone And you can select a different source for each room Making Multi Zone Connections There are two ways you can connect Zone speakers 1 Connect them directly to the AV receiver 2 Connect them to an additional amplifier Connecting Your Zone Speakers Directly to the AV receiver This setup allows you to select different sources for Main room and Zone 2 3 This is called Powered Zone as the Zone 2 3 speakers are powered by the AV receiver To use this setup
58. codes gt 02615 Apple TV Controlling MHL Enabled Mobile Device By programming the supplied remote controller with the appropriate remote control code you can use it to operate your MHL enabled mobile device Connect your MHL enabled mobile device to the AUX INPUT MHL jack We advise you to program the remote control code on the AUX button Use the following remote control codes North American models gt 33101 MHL enabled mobile device European models 32910 MHL enabled mobile device Note With some mobile devices reliable operation cannot be guaranteed Controlling a Blu ray Disc DVD Player HD DVD Player or DVD Recorder BD DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control code for controlling a component that supports the 1 0 limited to some models The component must be able to receive remote control commands via f31IFHD and be connected to the AV receiver via HDMI Use the following remote control codes gt 32910 33101 33501 31612 Blu ray Disc DVD player with RIFLD 1 The RIHD supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control function of the HDMI standard Press the appropriate REMOTE MODE button first RECEIVER SOURCE Mi o SPIGUIDE f PLAYLIST 4 E ACTNITIES DISPLAY r REMOTE MODE INPUT SELECTOR qm Controlling Other Components B TV operation Available buttons CD INPUT TV VOL A Y Number
59. degrees With this setting you can optimize the Theater Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front left and right speakers relative to the listening position Ideally the front left and right speakers should be equidistant from the listening position and at an angle close to one of the two available settings Front left speaker O Front right speaker Y f Y vul Listening angle 30 Note For best results we recommend setting Narrow to 20 and Wide to 40 LFE Level E Dolby Digital DTS Multich PCM Dolby TrueHD DTS HD Master Audio DSD 3 gt codB 20dB 10dB or 0dB With these settings you can set the level of the LFE Low Frequency Effects channel individually for each input sources If you find that low frequency effects are too loud when using one of these sources change the setting to 20 dB or 00 dB 1 Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources 2 DTS and DTS HD High Resolution sources 8 DSD Super Audio CD sources Direct E Analog Subwoofer gt Off gt On Analog audio signals bass signals are output This setting determines whether or not analog audio signals bass signals are output from front speakers when the Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected Note If the Subwoofer setting is set to No gt page 64 this setting cannot be selected When Digital Processing Crossover Network is being used this setting is
60. different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help For Canadian Models NOTE THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES 003 For models having a power cord with a polarized plug CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT FULLY INSERT Mod le pour les Canadien REMARQUE CET APPAREIL NUM RIQUE DE LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME LA NORME NMB 003 DU CANADA Sur les mod les dont la fiche est polaris e ATTENTION POUR VITER LES CHOCS LECTRIQUES INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU AU FOND For British models Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel IMPORTANT The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code Blue Neutral Brown Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red IMPORTANT The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse If the fuse needs
61. down Contact your ISP Others Retry the update procedure from the beginning If the error persists please contact Onkyo Support gt page 106 and provide the error code Case 2 If an error occurs during the update process disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try again En 104 Y Appendix Case 3 If you do not have an Internet connection to the network please contact Onkyo Support gt page 106 Updating the Firmware via USB The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using a USB device Note Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver during the update process Never plug or unplug an HDMI cable or a USB device during the update process Never unplug the USB storage device containing the firmware file or the AC power cord during the update process Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it is being updated It takes up to 60 minutes to complete the firmware update The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update is finished Before Starting Set the HDMI Control RIHD setting to Off gt page 79 Turn off the controller device connected via RS232 and network Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio iPod iPhone USB or servers etc If there is any data in the USB device remove it first Update Procedure 7 Connect a USB device to your PC If the
62. e mail et votre mot de passe Conseil Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur consultez Utilisation de plusieurs comptes page 1 L identification peut tre r alis e partir de l cran Users 2 Pour lire une station utilisez A V pour s lectionner la station dans votre liste de stations puis appuyez sur ENTER La lecture d bute et l cran de lecture s affiche Create a New Station Saisissez le nom d une chanson d un artiste ou d un genre et Pandora cr era une station radio unique pour vous en fonction des qualit s musicales de la chanson de l artiste ou du genre choisi E El ments du menu I like this song Acceptez la chanson et Pandora lira d autres musiques similaires I don t like this song Rejetez la chanson et Pandora liminera cette chanson de la station courante Why is this song playing D couvrez certains des attributs musicaux que Pandora utilise pour cr er vos stations radio personnelles Don t play the song for a month Si vous en avez assez d une chanson vous pouvez mettre la chanson au repos et Pandora ne la lira plus pendant un mois Create station from this artist Permet de cr er une station radio partir de cet artiste Fr2 V Utilisation d une webradio Delete this station Ceci supprimera de facon permanente la station de votre compte Pandora Au cas o vous d cideriez de r cr er la station avec les m mes chanso
63. front panel The current setting is displayed Press MONITOR OUT on the AV receiver repeatedly to select gt Analog HDMI Main HDMI Sub or Both A Enso Y Advanced Operations E Zone 2 HDMI gt Not Use gt Use When this setting is enabled the TV connected to HDMI OUT ZONE 2 can be used as the TV of Zone 2 Tip Onthe connected component select the mode in which the delay between the video and audio does not occur much if the video signal delay occurs during the playback on the video component connected to the AV receiver Note This setting cannot be selected if the Monitor Out setting is set to Sub or Both E Resolution gt Through Select this to pass video through the AV receiver at the same resolution and with no conversion gt Auto Select this to have the AV receiver automatically convert video at resolutions supported by your TV gt 480p 480p 576p 720p 10801 Select the desired output resolution gt 1080p 2 Select this for 1080p output and video conversion as necessary gt 1080p 24 2 Select this for 1080p output at 24 frames per second gt 4K Upscaling Select this for an output resolution four times that of 1080p Depending on the resolution supported by your TV it will result in either 3840 x 2160 or 4096 x 2160 pixels Source Select this for an output following the resolution level set in Picture Adjust gt page 74 Ly To be continu
64. gt pages 28 29 Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver is turned on Please wait until it becomes operable First press USB repeatedly to select the USB Front or USB Rear input Then press ENTER to select a drive or browse the contents of the media connected followed by A W to select the desired folder or track Pressing ENTER as a track is selected will start playback Note Only the front panel USB input is compatible with iPod iPhone B InstaPrevue gt With this selection you can preview audio video streams coming from HDMI inputs HDMI IN 1 2 3 4 AUX INPUT Even with multiple components connected through HDMI you can easily switch between inputs as their previews are displayed on a single screen Press ENTER to display the main preview currently selected HDMI input and the additional previews other HDMI inputs Using A W or 4 to select a preview thumbnail and pressing ENTER will switch the AV receiver to that input source 50 Y Turning On amp Basic Operations Tip f no video signals are present the thumbnails will be filled in black You can specify the number of preview thumbnails as well as their positioning on screen page 81 Note This function cannot be selected when HDMI IN 5 6 7 8 is the current HDMI input source or No signal is present on the current input source or The Zone 2 HDMI setting is set
65. how much the output is muted when the muting function is used gt page 52 A En 78 Advanced Operations E Maximum Volume Off 50 to 99 Absolute display gt Off 32dB to 17dB Relative display With this setting you can limit the maximum volume To disable this setting select Off E Power On Volume gt Last Min 1 to 99 or Max Absolute display Last codB 81dB to 18dB Relative display With this preference you can specify the volume setting to be used each time the AV receiver is turned on To use the same volume level that was used when the AV receiver was turned off select Last The Power On Volume setting cannot be set higher than the Maximum Volume setting B Headphone Level 12dB to 0dB to 12dB With this setting you can specify the headphone volume relative to the main volume This is useful if there s a volume difference between your speakers and your headphones OSD Setup E On Screen Display gt On gt Off This preference determines whether operation details are displayed on screen when an AV receiver function is adjusted Even when On is selected operation details may not be output if the input source is connected to an HDMI IN E Language North American models English Deutsch Francais Espa ol Italiano Nederlands Svenska European models English Deutsch Francais Espa ol Italiano Nederlands Svenska 1 This setting determin
66. is set too high and the sound distorts detection issues may occur so use an appropriate volume level If the subwoofer has a low pass filter switch set it to Off or Direct Refer to your subwoofer s instruction manual for details Using the Listening Modes Selecting Listening Modes See About Listening Modes for detailed information about the listening modes gt page 43 B Listening Mode Buttons Press RECEIVER first PREV CH PLAYLIST PLAYLIST MUSIC Ex EE GAME MOVIE TV WD THX E e666 PURE AUDIO MOVIE TV MUSIC GAME THX A En42 V Turning On amp Basic Operations MOVIE TV button This button selects the listening modes intended for use with movies and TV MUSIC button This button selects the listening modes intended for use with music GAME button This button selects the listening modes intended for use with video games THX button This button selects the THX listening modes PURE AUDIO button and indicator This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode When this mode is selected the AV receiver s display and analog video circuitry are turned off Only video signals input through HDMI input can be output from the HDMI output The indicator lights when this mode is selected Pressing this button again will select the previous listening mode The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be selected if your Blu ray Disc DVD player
67. macros are deleted ACTIVITIES are restored to their default settings namely the Easy macro commands gt page 53 When using Normal macros Easy macros cannot be used which includes changing the source components A En96 Y Controlling Other Components Troubleshooting If you have any trouble using the AV receiver look for a solution in this section If you can t resolve the issue yourself contact your Onkyo dealer If you can t resolve the issue yourself try resetting the AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults turn it on and while holding down CBL SAT press OON STANDBY Clear will appear on the AV receiver s display and the AV receiver will enter standby mode CBL SAT ON STANDBY Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your radio presets and custom settings REMOTE MODE INPUT SELECTOR DDD eo RECEIVER RETURN To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults while holding down RECEIVER press and hold down HOME until RECEIVER lights about 3 seconds Within 30 seconds press RECEIVER again The on screen information appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI outputs If your TV is connected to other video outputs use the AV receiver s display when changing settings Power Bi Can t turn on the AV receiver Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into the wall outlet Unplug the power
68. n DISPLAY aproximadamente 3 segundos Se iluminar el bot n REMOTE MODE indicador Remote En los productos Integra los nombres de los botones aparecen con may sculas Por ejemplo el bot n Remote Mode y el bot n Display Notas No podr n introducirse c digos de mando a distancia para RECEIVER y el bot n multizona nicamente podr n introducirse c digos de mando a distancia de televisor para el bot n TV Con la excepci n de RECEIVER TV y el bot n multizona se pueden asignar c digos de mando a distancia de cualquier categor a a los botones de REMOTE MODE No obstante estos botones tambi n pueden funcionar como botones de selector de entrada por tanto seleccione un bot n REMOTE MODE que se corresponda con la entrada a la cual est conectado el componente Por ejemplo si conecta un reproductor de CD a la entrada de CD seleccione TV CD cuando introduzca su c digo de mando a distancia Antes de que transcurran 30 segundos utilice los botones num ricos para introducir el c digo de mando a distancia de 5 d gitos El bot n REMOTE MODE indicador Remote parpadear dos veces Si el c digo de mando a distancia no se introduce correctamente el bot n REMOTE MODE indicador Remote parpadear una vez despacio Notas El parpadeo del mando distancia ser distinto segtin el modelo de receptor de AV El mando a distancia est preconfigurado con los ajustes predeterminados de los distin
69. not available E DSD DAC Direct gt Off gt On DSD signals are not processed by the DSP This setting determines whether or not DSD Super Audio CD audio signals are passed through the DSP for A V En 71 V Advanced Operations Sync delay etc processing when the Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected Note When Digital Processing Crossover Network is being used this setting is not available Sound Program Edit E Sound Program Stereo Source 1 Stereo Source 2 Stereo Source 3 Multich Source 1 Multich Source 2 Multich Source 3 When playing back different content types on the same source or when listening to a single content type on different sources you can pre register the settings that best suit each content in Sound Program The registered settings can then be called up and modified in one set Use Sound Program Edit to register and modify a combination of settings Tip To select the registered settings see Sound Program gt page 55 E Listening Mode You can assign a default listening mode that will be selected automatically when you select the sound program The Last Valid option means that the listening mode selected last will be used The Straight Decode option means that straight decoding listening mode Dolby Digital DTS etc is selected Subwoofer gt No Yes You can choose whether or not to use the subwoofer with the sound program E Music Opt
70. not using any surround back speakers these settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II not Dolby Pro Logic IIx Panorama gt On gt Off With this setting you can broaden the width of the front stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode Dimension gt 3 to 0 to 3 With this setting you can move the sound field forward or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode Higher settings move the sound field backward Lower settings move it forward If the stereo image feels too wide or there s too much surround sound move the sound field forward to improve the balance Conversely if the stereo image feels like it s in mono or there s not enough surround sound move it backward Center Width gt 0to3to7 With this setting you can adjust the width of the sound from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode Normally if you re using a center speaker the center channel sound is output from only the center speaker If you re not using a center speaker the center channel sound will be distributed to the front left and right speakers to create a phantom center This setting controls the front left right and center mix allowing you to adjust the weight of the center channel sound E PL liz Height Gain gt Low gt Mid gt High The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz enables the listener to select how much gain is applied to the
71. output from the HDMI output You may want to turn this preference on if your TV is connected to the HDMI output and you want to listen to the audio from a connected component through your TV s speakers Normally this should be set to Off Note If On is selected and the audio can be output from the TV the AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers In this case TV Speaker appears on the AV receiver s display by pressing DISPLAY When HDMI Control RIHD is set to On this setting is fixed to Auto When Digital Processing Crossover Network is being used this setting is not available With some TVs and input signals no sound may be output even when this setting is set to On When Audio TV Out or HDMI Control RIHD is set to On and you re listening through your TV s speakers page 18 turning up the AV receiver s volume control will make the sound be output from the AV receiver s front left and right speakers To stop the AV receiver s speakers producing sound change the settings change your TV s settings or turn down the AV receiver s volume Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set to On and the input source is not HDMI En 80 Y Advanced Operations Audio Return Channel ARC Off Auto The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver The audio return channel ARC function
72. page 93 TV CD Onkyo CD player gt page 92 STB DVR Apple TV Looking up for Remote Control Codes You can look up for an appropriate remote control code from the on screen menu You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output HDMI OUT MAIN to make the following on screen setting 1 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME 2 Use lt gt to select Setup and then press ENTER 3 Use A F to select Remote Controller Setup and hen press ENTER 4 Use A F to select Remote Mode Setup and then press ENTER 5 Use A V to select a remote mode and then press ENTER The menu of category selection appears e 6 Use A V to select a category and then press ENTER The keyboard screen for brand name input appears 7 Use A lt gt to select a character and then press ENTER Repeat this step for the first three characters of the brand name When you have entered the 3rd character select Search and press ENTER A list of brand names is retrieved If the desired brand name is not found Use gt to select Not Listed and then press ENTER The keyboard screen for brand name input appears En90 Y Controlling Other Components 8 Use A V to select a brand and then press ENTER A remote control code with its instructions are displayed Follow the procedure 9 If you can control the component use A V to select OK and then press ENTER The on screen menu returns to the Remote Mode Se
73. playback cannot be used in any of the following cases Network services are being used Contents are being played from a USB device or iPod iPhone Zones are turned on Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder This section explains how to play music files on a computer or NAS Network Attached Storage through the AV receiver Windows 7 Setup Bi Setting the sharing options 1 Select Choose homegroup and sharing options on the Control Panel Tip e f this option is not available verify that View by is set to Category Select Change advanced sharing settings N Under Home or Work verify that the following items are checked Turn on network discovery Turn on file and printer sharing Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can read and write files in the Public folders and Turn off password protected sharing 4 Select Save changes and click OK on the confirmation screen Q E Creating a shared folder 1 2 9 O KR 0 Right click the folder that you want to share Select Properties On the Sharing tab select Advanced Sharing Check the check box of Share this folder and then click OK Under Network File and Folder Sharing select Share Select and add Everyone from the pull down menu and then click Share Tip With this setting everyone is allowed to access the folder Tf you want
74. range This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film reference gt 15dB Select this setting for pop rock music or other program material that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range O To be continued 5 Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film reference To achieve the same reference level in a home theater system each speaker level must be adjusted so that 30 dBFS band limited 500 Hz to 2000 Hz pink noise produces 75 dB sound pressure level at the listening position A home theater system automatically calibrated by Audyssey MultEQ XT32 will play at reference level when the master volume control is set to the 0 dB position At that level you can hear the mix as the mixers heard it Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard film mix level It makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB However film reference level is not always used in music or other non film content Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level reference 5 dB 10 dB and 15 dB that can be selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard Note If Dynamic EQ setting is set to Off this technology cannot be used B Dynamic Volume gt Off gt Light Activates Light Compression Mode gt Medium Activat
75. receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP supplies IP addresses to the network devices allowing them to configure themselves automatically A router with a built in 100Base TX switch is recommended Some routers have a built in modem and some Internet Service Providers ISP require you to use specific routers Please consult your ISP or computer dealer if you re unsure Bi CAT5 Ethernet cable Use a shielded CATS Ethernet cable straight type to connect the AV receiver to your home network B Internet Access for Internet radio To receive Internet radio your Ethernet network must have Internet access A narrowband Internet connection e g 56K modem ISDN will not provide satisfactory results so a broadband connection is strongly recommended e g cable modem xDSL modem etc Please consult your ISP or computer dealer if you re unsure Note To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver your broadband Internet connection must be working and able to access the Web En 114 V Appendix Consult your ISP if you have any problems with your Internet connection The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network settings automatically If you want to configure these settings manually see Network gt page 81 The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings so if you have a PPPoE type Internet connection you must use a PPPoE compatible
76. reduce the mosquito noise and block artifact effects gt Through Does not adjust picture quality changes resolution gt Direct Does not adjust picture quality does not change resolution The video coming from an analog input and output by the HDMI output is processed in the same way as Through With Picture Mode you can change the following settings to be suitable for the movie or game screen by one operation Game Mode Film Mode Edge Enhancement Noise Reduction Mosquito NR Random NR Block NR Resolution Brightness Contrast Hue Saturation Color Temperature Gamma Red Brightness Red Contrast Green Brightness Green Contrast Blue Brightness or Blue Contrast The receiver has been designed to incorporate setup and calibration standards established by the Imaging Science Foundation ISF The ISF has developed carefully crafted industry recognized standards for optimal video performance and has implemented a training program for technicians and installers to use these standards to obtain optimal picture quality from the receiver Accordingly Onkyo recommends that setup and calibration be performed by an ISF Certified installation technician E Game Mode 5 6 gt Off gt On If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video component i e game console select the correspondin
77. remains on This is to prevent noise when you use the pause fast forward or fast reverse function on your player If you switch your player from DTS to PCM you may not hear any sound because the AV receiver does not switch formats immediately In such case you should stop your player for about three seconds and then resume playback With some CD and LD players you won t be able to playback DTS material properly even though your player is connected to a digital input on the AV receiver This is usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed e g output level sampling rate or frequency response changed and the AV receiver doesn t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal In such cases you may hear noise Playing DTS program material using the pause fast forward or fast reverse function on your player may produce a short audible noise This is not a malfunction E The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN can t be heard Since it takes longer to identify the format of an HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio signals audio output may not start immediately Bi There s no sound during Whole House Mode Make sure you ve selected an analog audio input Bi There s no picture Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed 17 in all the way Make sure that each video component is properly 18 19 connected If your TV is connected to the HDMI output set the 60
78. resetting the remote controller gt page 92 To overwrite a previously acquired command repeat this procedure Depending on the remote controller used some buttons may not respond as expected or the learning process itself may not be possible Only commands from infrared remote controllers can be acquired 95 Y Controlling Other Components When the remote controller runs out of batteries all commands acquired will be lost and will have to be learned all over again Therefore do not discard your other remote controllers E Deleting Acquired Commands 1 While holding down the REMOTE MODE button for the mode from which you want to delete a command press and hold down OTV until the REMOTE MODE button lights about 3 seconds Press the REMOTE MODE button or the button from which you want to delete the command The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice When you press the REMOTE MODE button all commands learned in that mode will be deleted Using Normal Macros You can program the remote controller s ACTIVITIES to perform a sequence of remote control actions Example To play a CD you typically need to perform the following actions 1 Press RECEIVER to select the Receiver remote controller mode 2 Press ORECEIVER to turn on the AV receiver 3 Press TV CD to select the TV CD input source 4 Press We to start playback on the CD player You can program ACTIVITIES so that all four actions are
79. speaker cables may affect the sound quality and should be avoided Be careful not to short the positive and negative wires Doing so may damage the AV receiver Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have contact with the AV receiver s rear panel Doing so may damage the AV receiver Don t connect more than one cable to each speaker terminal Doing so may damage the AV receiver Don t connect one speaker to several terminals Using Dipole Speakers m v rd NY O TV screen S u mm u 27 V MN NS E Cc p fe ED You can use dipole speakers for the surround and surround back speakers Dipole speakers output the same sound in two directions Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to indicate how they should be positioned The surround dipole speakers a should be positioned so that their arrows point toward the TV screen while the surround back dipole speakers b should be positioned so that their arrows point toward each other as shown En15 V Connections Using Powered Subwoofers swi sw2 lk EXE g LINE INPUT LINE INPUT e Powered subwoofer 1 3 of wall position To find the best position for your subwo
80. surround back speaker L is connected gt 2ch Select if two left and right surround back speakers are connected Note If the Surround Back setting is set to None this setting cannot be selected E LPF of LFE Low Pass Filter for the LFE Channel gt 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz gt Off Low Pass Filter is not applied With this setting you can specify the cutoff frequency of the LFE channel s low pass filter LPF which can be used to filter out unwanted hum The LPF only applies to sources that use the LFE channel Note If you re using THX certified speakers select 80Hz Subwoofer Phase gt 0 180 Moves the subwoofer phase Note If the Subwoofer setting is set to No this setting cannot be selected Double Bass This setting is NOT set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup page 39 gt On gt Off THX Turn this setting on to boost bass output by feeding bass sounds from the front left right and center channels to the subwoofer Note When the Subwoofer setting is set to No or the Front setting to anything other than Full Band this setting is fixed to This setting is set to automatically when the Subwoofer setting is set to Ich or 2ch and the Front setting is set to Full Band for the first time If you re using THX certified speakers se
81. switches between song information during playback Press this button while the list screen is displayed to return to the playback screen ALBUM In Standard Mode iPod iPhone this button selects albums MENU This button displays the menu of Internet radio services RETURN This button returns to the previous menu gt gt This button selects the next song o This button fast forwards the current song En27 V m This button stops playback MODE You can switch between Standard Mode and Extended Mode iPod iPhone RANDOM This button performs random playback REPEAT Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the repeat modes Tip See Controlling Other Components about the operation of other components gt page 90 Note The buttons you can use will differ depending on the devices and media used for playback Understanding Icons on the Display This section describes icons that appear on the AV receiver s display during media playback Icon Description Folder Track Playback Pause Fast Forward Fast Reverse Artist Album Repeat One Track Repeat Folder USB Device Repeat Shuffle Shuffle Album iPod iPhone Playing an iPod iPhone via USB The on screen information appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI outputs
82. the AV receiver automatically selects that component as the input source Bi System Off When you turn off the AV receiver the components turn off automatically E Remote Control You can use the AV receiver s remote controller to control your other RI capable Onkyo components pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver s remote control sensor instead of the component You must enter the appropriate remote control code first 2 page 92 ANALOG AUDIO OUT ANALOG AUDIO OUT RI Dock Note Use only RI cables for RI connections RI cables are supplied with Onkyo components Some components have two RI jacks You can connect either one to the AV receiver The other jack is for connecting additional RI capable components e Connect only Onkyo components to RI jacks Connecting other manufacturer s components may cause a malfunction Some components may not support all RI functions Refer to the manuals supplied with your Onkyo components While Zone 2 3 is on the System Off Auto Power On and Direct Change RI functions do not work En22 V Connections Connecting the Power Cord 1 Connect the supplied power cord to the AV receiver s AC INLET A To AC wall outlet 8 2 Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet Note Before connecting the power cord connect all of your speakers and AV components Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power s
83. the Late Night function depends on the material that you are playing and the intention of the original sound designer and with some material there will be little or no effect when you select the different options The Late Night function can be used only when the input source is Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD The Late Night function is set to Off when the AV receiver is set to standby For Dolby TrueHD sources it will be set to Auto With Dolby TrueHD sources the Late Night function cannot be used when TrueHD Loudness Management is set to Off gt page 69 The Late Night function cannot be used when Dolby Volume is set to On Ae Music Optimizer B Music Optimizer gt Off gt On The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound quality of compressed music files When set to On the M Opt indicator lights on the AV receiver s display Note The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and analog audio input signals The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected The setting is stored individually for each input selector When Sound Program is enabled the setting must be made with Sound Program Edit gt page 71 Re EQ With the Re EQ function you can compensate a soundtrack whose high frequency content is too harsh making it more sui
84. the cabinet via the connecting block La f IR Connecting gt receiver block IR IN Inside cabinet Remote controller lt Signal flow Using a Multiroom Kit with Other Components In this setup an IR emitter is connected to the AV receiver s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other component s remote control sensor Infrared signals received at the AV receiver s IR IN jack are fed through to the other component via the IR emitter Signals picked up by the AV receiver s remote control sensor are not output 24 SENE IR receiver IR INL block Rouri AV receiver 2 IR Emitter CL Remote controller Other component Signal flow The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver s IR OUT jack as shown below From the connecting block Miniplug cable Other component Remote control sensor o AV receiver y Emitter CIN u 4 NN IR Emitter Miniplug lt Signal flow 87 Advanced Operations iPod iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock Using the Onkyo Dock The Dock is sold separately Models sold are different depending on the region For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock components see the Onkyo web site at http www onkyo com Before using the Onkyo Dock components update your iPod iPhone with the latest softwa
85. to an input source These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the AV receiver is set to standby To save the setting you made here go to Level Calibration gt page 66 before setting the AV receiver to standby Note You cannot use these function while the AV receiver is muted These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones is connected Speakers that are set to No or None in Speaker Configuration gt page 64 cannot be adjusted When Sound Program is enabled Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer 2 cannot be used if the Subwoofer setting is set to No in Sound Program Edit page 71 1 If the Subwoofer setting is set to Ich this setting cannot be selected gt page 64 Dolby Volume E Dolby Volume See Dolby Volume of Audio Adjust gt page 70 Note This setting cannot be used in either of the following cases The Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected Any of the THX listening modes is selected with Loudness Plus set to On or Preserve THX Settings set to Yes 2 page 67 When Dolby Volume is set to On the Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume settings of all input selectors are switched to Off When Sound Program is enabled the setting must be made with Sound Program Edit gt page 71 Audyssey B Audyssey See Audyssey in Source Setup page 72 B Dynamic EQ See Dynamic
86. to assign a user name and password to the folder make the corresponding settings for Permissions in Advanced Sharing of the Sharing tab Verify that Workgroup is properly set Note When using NAS Network Attached Storage refer to the instruction manual provided with your NAS unit A En33 V Turning On amp Basic Operations Playing music files on a shared folder In order to enjoy Home Media you must first create a shared folder on your computer 1 On the remote controller press RECEIVER followed by NET The network service screen appears The NET indicator lights If it flashes confirm the network connection Tip The same operation can be done by selecting Network Service in the Home menu Use A Y 4 to select Home Media and press ENTER Use A V to select a server and then press ENTER Tip The server name of your computer can be viewed on the computer properties screen Use A V to select the desired shared folder and then press ENTER When asked for a user name and password enter the necessary login information Tip The login information will be remembered for the next time you log in The login information is that of the user account set when creating a shared folder Use A F to select a music file and then press ENTER or gt The playback of the selected file starts 50 Listening to AM FM Radio This section describes the procedure of using th
87. to be replaced the replacement fuse must approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same ampere rating as that indicated on the plug Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse If the power cord s plug is not suitable for your socket outlets cut it off and fit a suitable plug Fit a suitable fuse in the plug For European Models Declaration of Conformity We ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6 82194 GROEBENZELL GERMANY declare in own responsibility that the ONKYO product described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the corresponding technical standards such as EN60065 EN55013 EN55020 and EN61000 3 2 3 3 GROEBENZELL GERMANY K MIYAGI ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH En4 V Safety Information and Introduction Supplied Accessories Make sure you have the following accessories Indoor FM antenna gt page 21 AM loop antenna page 21 North American models Two AM loop antennas and two Indoor FM antennas are supplied Power cord gt page 22 Speaker cable labels page 14 Speaker setup microphone page 40 Remote controller RC 840M and two batteries AA R6 Quick Start Guide n catalogs and on packaging the letter at the end of the product name indicates the color Specifications and operations are the same regardless of color E Installing the batteries Batteries AA R6 Note If the
88. unsuccessful recordings caused by the unit s malfunction Before you record important data make sure that the material will be recorded correctly ESSO En 102 V Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet set the AV receiver to standby Appendix Important Note Regarding Video Playback The AV receiver can upconvert component video and composite video sources for display on a TV connected to the HDMI output However if the picture quality of the source is poor upconversion may make the picture worse or disappear altogether In this case try the following 1 If the video source is connected to a component video input connect your TV to COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT If the video source is connected to a composite video input connect your TV to MONITOR OUT V 2 On the main menu select Input Output Assign and then Component Video Input page 62 If the video source is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1 select the relevant input selector and assign it to INT If the video source is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2 select the relevant input selector and assign it to IN2 If the video source is connected to a composite video input select the relevant input selector and assign it to Tip To by pass the upconversion set the Picture Mode setting to Direct page 75 Firmware Update To update the firmware of the AV receiver you can choose from the followin
89. video sources can be upconverted and output by the HDMI output You can set this for each input selector by selecting the option See Video Connection Formats for more information on video signal flow and upconversion page 107 Composite video component video Y b Y C OUT Composite video component video 1 This applies only when Monitor Out setting is set to other than Analog page 60 Here are the default assignments Input selector Default assignment BD DVD HDMI CBL SAT HDMI STB DVR HDMI3 GAMEI HDMIA GAME2 HDMIS PC HDMI6 2 AUX FRONT Fixed TV CD Jj PHONO j 2 If you connect your personal computer to PC IN Analog RGB you must assign to the PC input selector A Ens V Advanced Operations E BD DVD CBL SAT STB DVR GAME1 GAME2 PC TV CD PHONO gt HDMI HDMI HDMI3 HDMIA HDMIS HDMI6 HDMI7 HDMIS Select the input to which the component has been connected Output composite video and component video sources from the HDMI output The video output signal from the HDMI output is the one configured in Component Video Input Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input selectors or more When HDMII HDMIS have already been assigned you must first set any unused input selectors to or you will be unable to assign HDMI1 HDMIS to other input selectors Note
90. 02 Fujitsu 01497 Sony UO Motorola 01376 Stofa 02015 TeliaSonera 01385 Humax 00660 02142 02447 Moxi 02187 oxi Telus 02345 03051 03053 Suddenlink 01376 01877 Numericable 02767 Thomson 02769 Insight 01376 01877 Sumitomo 01500 Pace 01877 Verizon 02378 J COM 03051 03053 Telewest 01068 Tans 01385 Panasonic 01982 Knology Tae 02345 Philips 01582 02767 IPTV PVR Combination Kreatel S RN Pioneer 01877 ADB 02769 Macab cun a Rogers 01877 Aon 02769 Mediacom 01376 01877 Time Warner 01376 01877 02187 y Ae Remote Control Codes IPTV PVR Combination CD CD MD AT amp T 00858 Goldmund 70157 Restek 70157 Yamaha 70490 BT Vision 02294 Grundig 70157 Revox 70157 Cisco 00858 02345 02378 Harman Kardon 70157 Rotel 70157 Cassette Deck Kreatel 01385 Hitachi 70032 SAE 70157 Aiwa 40029 Motorola 00858 02378 Integra 71817 70101 Sansui 70157 Arcam 40076 Neuf TV 03107 JVC 70072 SAST 70157 Audiolab 40029 Philips 02294 Kenwood 70626 70157 70036 Siemens 70157 Carver 40029 Scientific Atlanta 00858 Krell 70157 Silsonic 70036 Denon 40076 SFR 03107 Linn 70157 Simaudio 70157 Grundig 40029 Verizon 02378 Loewe 70157 Sonic Front
91. 0512 Wansa 12098 ReplayTV 20614 20616 Tecnimagen 10556 11363 Wards 10178 Sonic Blue 20614 20616 Teco 10178 10653 Triad 10336 Watson 10037 10714 10668 Sony 20636 Tedelex 10208 11709 Trio 11248 11037 TiVo 20636 20739 Teknika 10150 Triumph 10556 10037 Wega 10037 TELE System 11585 TVTEXT 95 10556 Welltech 10714 11652 PVR Telecor 10037 Uher 10037 Weltstar 11037 DirecTV 20739 Telefunken 10037 10625 10714 Ultravox 10037 Westinghouse 11755 Go Video 20614 10560 10698 11585 UMC 11614 11775 Wharfedale 10556 10037 11324 Humax 20739 Unic Line 10037 11667 Panasonic 20614 20616 Telefusion 10037 Uniden 12122 White Westinghouse 10037 Philips 20739 Telegazi 10037 United 10556 10037 10714 Wilson 10556 ReplayTV 20614 20616 Telemeister 10037 11037 10715 11652 Windsor 10668 11037 Sonic Blue 20614 20616 Telesonic 10037 Unitek 11709 Windy Sam 10556 Sony 20636 Telestar 10556 10037 Universal 10037 10714 Wintel 10714 TiVo 20636 20739 Teletech 10037 10668 11037 Universum 10037 10668 10195 World of Vision 12001 Teleview 10037 11037 10618 10512 Wyse 11365 TV VCR Combination Tennessee 10037 uvas 10037 Xenius 10634 Amstrad 10171 Tensai 10037 11037 10715 V7 Videoseven 11666 11755 Xiahua 10698 Fersen 10625 Tesla 10556 10037 10714 Vestel et Or IDR 10698 Fidelity 10171 11037 11652 Xrypton 10037 GoldStar 10037 Tevion 10556 10037 10714 Vexa 10037 10668 11037 11248 Victor 10650 10653 11428 Grundig 10556 10037 10
92. 108 When the resolution is set to any resolution not 60 supported by the TV no video is output from the HDMI output If the message Resolution Error appears on the AV receiver s display this indicates that your TV does not support the current video resolution and you need to select another resolution on your DVD player En99 Y Appendix E The on screen menus don t appear On your TV make sure that the video input to which the AV receiver is connected is selected When the AV receiver is not connected to a TV via HDMI OUT MAIN on screen menus are not displayed E The on screen information does not appear Depending on the input signal the on screen 54 information may not appear when the input signal from HDMI IN is output to a device connected to the HDMI output Tuner E Reception is noisy FM stereo reception is noisy or the FM STEREO indicator doesn t light Relocate your antenna Move the AV receiver away from your TV or computer Listen to the station in mono 34 When listening to an AM station operating the remote controller may cause noise Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference Concrete walls weaken radio signals If nothing improves the reception install an outdoor antenna Appendix Remote Controller If you cannot operate it you will need to enter the 90 Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or
93. 1886 Hitachi m 10178 P Jinfeng 10208 Euroman 10037 Godrej 11585 ER nn Tinxing 10556 10037 10698 Europa 10037 Goldfunk 10668 11585 11643 11667 JMB 10556 10634 10499 Europhon 10037 GoldStar 10178 10037 10714 11691 12433 Jubilee 10556 Evesham 11248 11667 10715 Hitachi Fujian 10150 JVC 10650 10653 10508 Excello 11037 Goodmans 10556 10037 10625 Hitec 10698 11428 11601 12271 Exquisit 10037 10714 10560 10668 Hoeher 10714 Kaisui 10037 10634 11037 10499 Ferguson 10037 10625 10560 11585 11667 Hornyphon 10037 Karcher 10714 11324 10195 11037 11585 11585 Hugoson 11666 Kathrein 10556 Fidelity 10171 10037 10512 16037 Humax 11295 Kendo 10037 11037 11585 Finlandia 10208 Graetz 10714 Hypson 10556 10037 10714 Kennex 11037 Finlux 10556 10037 10714 Granada 10037 10560 10208 10668 11037 10715 Kioto 10556 10715 11248 11667 Hyundai 11037 10698 Kiton 10037 10668 er Grandin 10556 10037 10714 Firstline 10556 10037 10714 Iberia 10037 KLL 10037 10668 11037 10208 10668 11037 10715 11363 11652 10037 Kneissel 10556 10037 10499 Fisher 10208 Grundig s 10037 FA iLo 11394 Koenig 10037 in i 11223 11667 12625 Imperial 10037 Kolin 10150 10037 11610 GVA 11363 12098 i 11755 F 10037 Indiana 10037 SERM H amp B 12001 Kolster 10037 Frab 10037 Ingelen 10714 dois Haier 10037 10698 10508 10037 10714 Inno Hit 11037 11585 Friac 10037 10499 Hallmark 10178 Korpel 10037 Fu
94. 195 11585 11667 Videocon 10037 10508 anal 10037 LG 10178 Thomson 10037 10625 10560 VideoSystem 10037 Yokan 10037 Mitsubishi 10556 Thorn 10037 10499 10512 Vidtech 10178 Yoko 10037 Philips 10556 10037 Thorn Ferguson 10499 Viewsonic 11365 11564 11755 YUMATU 10037 Radiola 10556 TMK 10178 12049 Zenith 10178 10037 11365 Saba 10625 Tokai 10037 10668 11037 Vision 10037 11423 12358 Sanyo 11974 Tokaido 11037 Vistron 11363 Zepto Schneider 10556 10037 Topline 10668 11037 Vivax 11709 zn 10698 10818 Toshiba 10195 11037 10618 Vizio 11758 12209 VCR Siemens 10037 10650 10508 11169 Vortec 10037 x Sony 11505 a 11524 11652 Voxson 10178 10037 ER nr Teac 10178 10171 15 y ley Remote Control Codes TV VCR Combination DVD DVD DVD Technics 10556 Dantax 30539 30713 Harman Kardon 30582 31229 33228 Maxim 30713 Thomson 10625 Denon 30490 30634 31634 Henss 30713 MDS 30713 32258 32748 Hitachi 30573 30713 31664 Medion 30630 30741 DVD Dick Smith 31152 Hoeher 30713 Memorex 32213 3D LAB 30539 Electronics HotMedia 31152 Metz 30571 30713 Accurian 30675 Digihome as Humax
95. 2 Utilisez A Y pour s lectionner un menu puis appuyez sur ENTER Search Station Vous pouvez rechercher une station par artiste par tag ou par nom d utilisateur Top Artists Station Vous pouvez lire des pistes des artistes les mieux valu s Top Tags Station Vous pouvez lire des pistes des tags les mieux valu s Personal Station Vous pouvez lire des pistes de votre station personnalis e Your Library Your Neighbourhood et Your Recommendations Frs V Utilisation d une webradio Profile Vous pouvez lire des pistes de Recently Listened Tracks Library et Neighbours Account Info V rifiez les informations de votre compte Sign Out Pour vous d connecter de votre compte 3 Utilisez A V pour s lectionner une station puis appuyez sur ENTER ou gt gt pour d marrer la lecture La lecture d bute et l cran de lecture s affiche E El ments du menu I Love this track L information de la piste est sauvegard e dans le serveur Last fm et la fr quence de lecture augmente Ban this track L information de la piste est sauvegard e dans le serveur Last fm et la fr quence de lecture diminue Add to My Favorites Permet d ajouter une station la liste My Favorites B Utilisation du contr le Scrobbling Utilisez A V pour s lectionner Enable puis appuyez sur ENTER Les services de webradio fournis par un tiers peuvent tre r sili s avec
96. 27 02761 Xsat 00847 01323 iNETBOX 01237 Thomson 01175 01662 Telestar nn es 01251 Xtreme 01300 Kaon 01300 Topfield 01206 Kathrein 01561 Viasat 01195 Televes 01300 01334 Yakumo aus 2 Maximum 01334 Xtreme 01300 Televisa 00887 Tes u Der wenn Zehnder 01251 01334 01413 Mediacom 01206 01631 MegaSat 01631 Television men E Mem ne Zinwell 02280 02761 Movistar 02527 AR Systems 103367 10097 em TE Multichoice 02059 02060 Accent 10037 de Satellite Set Top Box MySky 01356 01693 01850 Acer 11339 7 Pub TET sat 01300 NEOTION 01334 Acoustic Solutions 11037 11667 oshiba gt e 1251 01175 01356 01423 10650 Combination 01662 01693 01850 Addison 10653 Triax 00853 01251 01291 sat 01300 02059 02060 02211 AEG 11037 11324 0141310161191626 Amstrad 01175 01662 01693 02037 01631 Panasonic 01304 03099 Agfaphoto Atsat 01300 i Tricolor TV 01176 Aiko 10037 Phili 00099 True Visions 02408 Bell ExpressVu 00775 5 Lips RER Aim 10037 10499 01611 British Sky 01175 01662 Broadcasting Sat Control 01300 10 y Remote Control Codes
97. 50 02754 iotronic 01413 Metz 00173 Premiere 00723 SKY Brazil 00887 ISkyB 00887 Mocha 01251 Pro Basic 00853 SKY Deutschland 02754 ITT 02418 Movistar 02527 02761 Proline 01284 SKY Italia 00853 01693 01850 ITT Nokia 00723 Multichoice 00879 00642 01433 QNS 01404 SKY New Zealand 02211 Jadeworld 00642 02059 02060 RCA 01291 SKY PerfecTV 02299 02616 03099 Jaeger 01334 MySky 01356 01693 01850 Regal 01251 Sky XL 01251 Jvc 00775 NEOTION 01334 Roadstar 00853 Sky 01175 01662 KabelBW 01195 01882 01915 Netsat 00099 00887 Rollmaster 01413 Skymaster 01334 01409 01567 Kaon 01300 Nikko 00723 Rownsonic 01567 oie Kathrein 00173 01561 01567 Nokia 00853 00723 01223 SAB 01251 01300 01631 Skymax 01413 Kenwood 00853 Nordmende 01611 Sagem 01114 Skyplus 01175 01384 Koenig 01631 NPG 01631 Saivod 02418 PER _ Kreiling 01626 Onn 01284 Samsung 01377 00853 01175 SEIN _ 01334 Kreiselmeyer 00173 Optex 01413 01611 01626 01206 01458 01662 SM Electronic 01409 L amp S Electronic 01334 PRES 02986 Smart _ 01404 01413 01631 LaSAT 00173 Orbis 01334 Sansui 01251 SmartVision 01457 Lava 01631 Orbitech 01100 01195 Sanyo 01626 Sony 00847 00853 01558 Sat Control 01300 02299 2 Y Remote Control Codes Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box SAT PVR Combination SAT PVR Combination
98. 64 E The front high front wide and surround back speakers produce no sound Appendix E Can t get 6 2 7 2 playback Depending on the current listening mode no sound 42 may be produced by the front high front wide and surround back speakers Select another listening mode Depending on the sources the sound produced by the front high front wide and surround back speakers may be weak Make sure the speakers are configured correctly 64 When Powered Zone 2 is used playback in the main room is reduced to 5 2 channels and the front high front wide and surround back speakers produce no sound When Powered Zone 3 is used playback in the main room is reduced to 3 2 channels and the front high front wide and surround back speakers produce no sound E The subwoofer produces no sound If no surround back speakers front wide and front high speakers are connected or the Zone 2 3 speakers are being used 6 2 7 2 playback is not possible Depending on the number of connected speakers itis 42 49 not always possible to select all of the listening modes E The speaker volume cannot be set as required Check to see if a maximum volume has been set 78 If the volume level of each individual speaker has 39 66 been adjusted to high positive values then the maximum master volume possible may be reduced Note that the individual speaker volume levels are set automatically after the Audyssey MultEQ
99. 7 Radiomarelli 10037 Schneider 10556 10037 10714 10698 10512 11248 10668 11037 Sontec 10037 11363 11709 11755 RadioShack 10178 10037 Son 10810 11505 11167 5 Schoentech 11037 y i i Tec 10037 Radiotone 10037 10668 11037 11651 11825 7 Scotch 10178 Tech Line 10037 10668 RCA 10178 11454 10625 TET Soundesign 10178 Technica 11037 10560 10618 11781 cott Soundwave 10037 11037 10715 2 12247 12403 12429 Sears 10178 10171 TET Technics 10556 10650 12434 12746 12932 Seaway 10634 2 Technika 11667 Realistic 10178 TEE 11037 Squareview ag TechniSat 10556 Standard 10037 11037 11709 Recor 10037 SEG 10037 10668 11037 10714 11652 Rectiligne 10037 12719 Starlite 0047 11585 Redstar 10037 SEI 10037 Strato 10037 14 y Remote Control Codes Television Television Television VCR Technosonic 10556 10625 10499 Toyoda 11709 VU 11365 12098 Humax 20739 11324 TRANS continents 10556 10037 10668 Walker 11667 Panasonic 20614 20616 Techvision 11709 11037 Waltham 10037 10668 11037 Philips 20739 Techwood 11037 11667 Transonic 10037 10698 1
100. 713 Em 33052 Emerson 30675 30820 31635 32069 c mpm 30490 Foehn amp Hirsch 33052 Funai 30675 32329 32489 33195 Techwood 30713 xD Go Video 30741 Sanyo 30713 Teletech 30713 Harman Kardon 33228 GPX 30741 Schneider 30539 30646 30713 Theta Digital 30571 Insignia 30675 32428 32596 Hitachi 31664 Schoentech 30713 Integra 32147 32900 32910 m 30522 33100 33101 33500 Humax 30646 z a Toshiba 30503 31639 32277 33501 Irradio 30646 sun 32551 32705 33157 we TT We 31597 emp Transonic 31394 Ins 33052 LG 30741 Sharp 30630 30675 30713 TVE 30713 32250 32474 32652 Lexicon 32545 Loewe IOTH 32869 United 30675 30713 31152 LG 30741 31602 Magnavox 30646 30675 Sherwood 30741 33052 Universum 30741 30713 Limit 33052 Medion 30741 Shinsonic 30533 Urban Concepts 30503 Loewe 32474 32783 Panasonic 30490 31579 32523 Silva Schneider 30741 Vestel 30713 30675 es SilverCrest 31152 ERE 31597 Marantz 32414 32432 33444 Philips 30046 31340 Skantic 30539 30713 VAD SHORE Momitsu 33052 nee 3063 1 32800 SM Electronic 31152 Virek 108 32147 32900 32910 Bye es Smat 30713 Waltham 30713 33100 33101 33500 RCA 30522 Sony 30533 30864 31033 Wellington 30713 33501 Samsung 30490 31635 31070 31431 31516 Weltstar 30713 Oppo 32545 Schneider 30646 31633 32180 Wharfedale 30713 Panasonic 31641 32523 32859 Sharp 30630 30675 32869 Soundwave 30713 Windsor 30713 Philips 32084 32434 32689 Sony 31033
101. 72 FH Dolby Pro Logic II Game THX Ultra2 1393 72 SB Cinema 9 2 SB FH Games 9 2 SB FH Dolby Pro Logic gt Height THX 9 2 FH FWI The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II 9 2 SB FW Music DTS ES Game and THX Ultra2 Cinema modes can Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height THX MEX be used The PLII and THX indicators Games light on the AV receiver s display The combination of Dolby Pro Logic gt Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height THX GE 9 2 SB FH Height and THX Cinema Music Games Ultra2 Games modes can be used The combination of Dolby Pro Logic Iz The PLIIz and THX indicators light on the Height and THX Ultra2 Games modes can AV receiver s display be used DTS Neo X Cinema THX Cinema Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height THX 9 2 SB FH DTS Neo X Music THX Music Ultra2 Cinema DTS Neo X Game THX Games Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height THX The combination of DTS Neo X Ultra2 Music Cinema Music Game and THX Cinema The combination of Dolby Pro Logic gt Music Games modes can be used The Height and THX Ultra2 Cinema Music Neo X indicator lights on the AV modes can be used receiver s display THX Ultra2 Cinema 7 2 SB Note TAX V2 Cinema This mode expands 5 1 channel sources for NEUES 9 2 5B FH 1 Pure Audio cannot be selected when Zone 2 3 is active 7 1 channel playback It does this by 9 2 SB FW wae THX U2 Music analyzing the composition of the surround Besides if E 2 3 while Pure Audio is selected
102. 9 Sunstech 12001 Playsonic 10037 10714 10715 RFT 10037 Shintoshi 10037 Sunwood 10037 1652 Roadstar 10037 10714 10668 Shivaki 10178 10037 Supersonic 10208 Powerpoint 10037 10698 11037 10715 Siam 10037 SuperTech 10556 10037 Prinston 11037 10715 Rolson 12001 12098 Siemens 10037 10195 Supra 10178 Profitronic 10037 Rowa 10037 10698 Siera 10556 10037 mem 10208 Proline m 10625 10634 Saba 10625 10714 10560 Silva 10037 Sie 11614 11775 Sagem 10618 Silva Schneider 10037 Eon En a ie S d 10037 10668 11037 Sil 10715 e ieee nn 11324 11585 11667 axe a er 11709 12001 Salora 10208 12001 SilverCrest 11037 Symphonic 10171 11394 Protech 10037 10668 11037 Sampo 10178 10171 10650 Sinudyne 10037 Synco 10178 11755 Proton 10178 11755 SKY 10037 11614 11775 Syntax 11610 Pro Vision 10556 10037 10714 Samsung Te m E Skyworth 10037 10698 Sysline 10037 11324 12051 Sliding 11324 Tacico 10178 Pan 12001 Sansui 10171 10037 10714 SLX 10608 Tale 10178 Pye 10556 10037 11248 12001 Solavox 10037 Tashiko 10650 Qingdao 10208 Sanyo 11037 10508 10208 Soniko 10037 Tatung 10037 11248 11324 Quasar 10650 11142 11365 11585 Soniq 12493 TCL 10698 12403 12429 Quelle 10037 10668 10195 11667 11974 Sonitron 10208 12434 13183 11037 10512 SBR 10556 10037 Sonneclair 10037 TCM 10714 12001 R Line 10037 Schaub Lorenz 10714 11324 11363 Sonoko 10037 Teac 10178 10171 10037 Radiola 10556 10037 11667 12001 cem 35088 10714 10668 1103
103. AMEL appears on the AV receiver s display Press and hold down the same button about 3 seconds to change the input display Repeat this step to select the desired input display B TV CD TV CD gt DOCK T TAPE lt E GAME1 GAMEI DOCK Note DOCK can be selected for the TV CD GAME1 input selector but not at the same time Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the remote controller for the first time page 92 Using the Whole House Mode The Whole House Mode is useful when you want to add extra background music to your home party this allows you to enjoy the same stereo music as the main room in separate rooms Zone 2 3 The Whole House Mode selects the same input source for Multi Zone as the main room s See also Speaker Setup gt page 63 Multi Zone gt page 83 1 Press WHOLE HOUSE MODE on the front panel To cancel the Whole House Mode change the input source for the main room or select a listening mode 2 page 42 Note The Whole House Mode only supports analog audio To adjust the volume of Multi Zone switch the AV receiver to Multi Zone control See Adjusting the Volume for Zones gt page 85 for the volume adjustment of Multi Zone The Whole House Mode is not available in the following cases The Audio TV Out setting is set to On gt page 80 HDMI Control RIHD is set to On gt page 79
104. B DVR GAME 1 AUX or USB input If you have a game console connected to the composite video input and the picture isn t very clear you can attenuate the gain Video ATT Off The gain is not changed default Video ATT On The gain is reduced by the values specified below 2 dB for the ZONE 2 OUT V and HDMI output 6 dB for the MONITOR OUT V output Note With the USB input selector this setting is only available when an iPod iPhone is connected and set to Extended Mode Video or Standard Mode E If the picture on your TV monitor connected to the HDMI output is unstable try switching the DeepColor function off To turn off the DeepColor function simultaneously press the STB DVR and OON STANDBY buttons on the AV receiver While holding down STB DVR press OON STANDBY until Deep Color Off appears on the AV receiver s display Then release both buttons To reactivate the DeepColor function repeat the above process until Deep Color On appears on the AV receiver s display and release the buttons The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal processing and control functions In very rare situations severe interference noise from an external source or static electricity may cause it to lockup In the unlikely event that this happens unplug the power cord from the wall outlet wait at least five seconds and then plug it back in Onkyo is not responsible for damages such as CD rental fees due to
105. CD PHONO Selects the input source for which the HDMI Through function is enabled gt Last The HDMI Through function is activated on the input source selected at the time of setting the AV receiver to standby mode When enabling the HDMI Through function regardless of whether the AV receiver is on or in standby both audio and video streams from an HDMI input will be output to the TV or other components via HDMI connection The HDMI indicator will be dimly lit in standby mode Note that the indicator may not light under certain conditions 2 page 59 This setting is fixed to Auto automatically when the above HDMI Control RIHD setting is set to On resulting in automatic input source selection Note Only an input source assigned to an HDMI IN via HDMI Input setting is enabled page 61 The power consumption in standby mode will increase during the HDMI Through function however in the following cases the power consumption can be saved The TV is in standby mode You are watching a TV program Refer to the connected component s instruction manual for details Depending on the connected component the correct input source may not be selected with the setting fixed to Auto This setting is set to Off automatically when the HDMI Control RIHD setting is set to Off Audio TV Out gt Off gt On This preference determines whether the incoming audio signal is
106. CD remote mode This is useful when some buttons don t work as expected though you entered the appropriate remote control code gt page 91 1 While holding down the REMOTE MODE button for the mode in which you want to use the command press and hold down RECEIVER until the REMOTE MODE button lights about 3 seconds 2 On the supplied remote controller press the button to which you want to assign the new command 3 Point the remote controllers at each other within about 4 inches 10 cm apart and then press and hold the button whose command you want to acquire until the REMOTE MODE button flashes If the command is learned successfully the REMOTE MODE button flashes twice Within about 4 inches 10 cm Supplied remote controller 4 To learn more commands repeat steps 2 and 3 Press any REMOTE MODE button when you ve finished The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice Note The following buttons cannot learn new commands ORECEIVER ALL OFF MY MOVIE MY TV MY MUSIC REMOTE MODE MODE The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to 90 commands although this will be less if commands that use a lot of memory are learned Remote controller buttons such as Play Stop and Pause are preprogrammed with commands for controlling Onkyo CD players cassette decks and DVD players However they can learn new commands and you can restore the preprogrammed commands at any time by
107. Confirms your entry Tip 1 This can also be performed by using 10 on the remote controller 2 Press CLR on the remote controller to delete all the characters you have input Tip To name a radio preset use TUNER to select AM or FM and then select the preset gt page 35 To restore a name to its default erase all characters with CLR select OK and then press ENTER Note This setting cannot be used for the NET and USB input selectors En 74 V Advanced Operations Picture Adjust Using Picture Adjust you can adjust the picture quality and reduce any noise appearing on the screen Press ENTER to view the TV picture while setting when the video source is output to HDMI OUT MAIN To return to the previous screen press RETURN E Wide Mode This setting determines the aspect ratio gt 4 3 gt Zoom gt Wide Zoom gt Auto According to the input signals and monitor output setting the AV receiver automatically selects the 4 3 Full Zoom or Wide Zoom mode See Monitor Out for details on the monitor output setting gt page 60 Bi Picture Mode gt Custom All settings can be performed manually gt ISF Day Select when the room is bright gt ISF Night Select when the room is dark gt Cinema Select when the picture source is a movie or alike Game Select when the video source is a game console gt Streaming Attempts to
108. EQ in Source Setup gt page 72 B Dynamic Volume See Dynamic Volume in Source Setup page 73 Note These technologies can be used when all the following conditions are met Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed Note that Audyssey requires the Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration method Any listening mode other than Direct or Pure Audio is selected A pair of headphones is not connected The setting is stored individually for each input selector Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume cannot be selected when any of the THX listening modes is selected with Loudness Plus set to On or Preserve THX Settings set to Yes 2 page 67 When Sound Program is enabled the setting must be made with Sound Program Edit gt page 71 En 56 Y Advanced Operations Late Night E Late Night For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources the options are gt Off gt Low Small reduction in dynamic range gt High Large reduction in dynamic range For Dolby TrueHD sources the options are gt Auto The Late Night function is set to On or Off automatically gt Off gt On Turn this setting on to reduce the dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume levels ideal for watching movies late at night when you don t want to disturb anyone Note The effect of
109. I PR 0 fH FY PAH DY AY ASE TIL o EN SRS BI BEREIT IN BARA SHR ARE EP RARE A DOVE PREFACE TH ACIER LEE MENT fe S6 1 7 Ue LH Be HE AY IR ri SR TRE A TH DE DEL BUS NETT e RAT EN ENS DEBERI XE FA SNE Remote Control Codes Dedicated Onkyo Receiver Cable Set Top Box Cable Set Top Box Cable PVR Combination Default 62503 mio TV 02802 Toshiba 01509 Samsung 01877 Zone 2 62506 Motorola 01376 00858 01562 UPC 01582 Scientific Atlanta 01877 01982 Zone 3 62507 01982 01998 02378 Verizon 02378 Shaw 01376 Moxi 02187 Videotron 01877 Suddenlink 01376 01877 Cable Set Top Box NEC 01496 Virgin Media 01068 01060 Thomson 01582 ADB 02254 02769 Neuf TV 03107 Visiopass 00817 Time Warner 01376 01877 02187 Aon 02769 Noos 00817 VTR 01376 UPC 01582 Arris 02187 NTL 01068 01060 Wid
110. I Input setting page 61 With connection 4 you can enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS To listen in Zone 2 3 as well use 4 and 6 e With connection 6 you can enjoy analog video from external components while you are in Zone 2 e With connection 6 you can enjoy audio from external components while you are in Zone 2 3 With connection 6 if your Blu ray Disc DVD player has both the main stereo and multichannel outputs be sure to connect the main stereo En20 Y Connections Connections Connecting the Antennas This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna The AV receiver won t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected so you must connect the antenna to use the tuner North American models c Push Sq Insert the plug fully into the jack Insert wire Release Eu Be careful not to injure yourself when using thumbtacks Thumbtacks etc X Indoor FM antenna supplied Assembling the AM loop antenna 9 9 AM loop antenna supplied Tip If you want to select different radio stations for the main room and Zone 2 respectively connect the indoor FM antenna or AM loop antenna to the ZONE 2 FM ANTENNA jack or the ZONE 2 AM ANTENNA terminal Note European models a Insert the plug fully into the jack 9 Inser
111. ING indicator 52 36 9 Volume level AUTO indicator 94 USB indicator 28 29 TUNED indicator 34 SLEEP indicator 51 FM STEREO indicator 34 Ento V an North American models CD RS232 port Terminal for control DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks 8 USB port ETHERNET port RI REMOTE CONTROL jack HDMI IN and HDMI output HDMI OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB ZONE 2 jacks COMPONENT VIDEO IN and MONITOR OUT jacks IR IN and OUT jacks 9 ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 12V TRIGGER OUT jacks ZONE 2 OUT V jack ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks 3 MAIN ZONE 2 FM ANTENNA jacks and MAIN ZONE 2 AM ANTENNA terminals 3 PC IN jack AC INLET 9 GND screw Composite video and analog audio jacks BD DVD IN CBL SAT IN STB DVR IN GAME 1 IN PC IN TV CD IN and PHONO IN MONITOR OUT V jack En 11 V Safety Information and Introduction European models PRE OUT jacks FRONT L R CENTER SURR L R SB FH FW L R SW1 and SW2 1 SB Surround Back FH Front High FW Front Wide SB FH FW EXT AMP jacks Speaker Terminals FRONT L R CENTER SURR L R SURR BACK L R FRONT HIGH ZONE 3 L R and FRONT WIDE ZONE 2 L R FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal See Connecting the AV Receiver for connection 2 pages 13 to 22 Remote Controller Contro
112. O 3 playback 3 AUX INPUT VIDEO Camcorder etc AUDIO L R DIGITAL m DIGITAL IN COAXIAL 1 BD DVD Blu ray Disc DVD player W COAXIAL 2 CBL SAT Satellite cable set top box W etc COAXIAL 3 STB DVR Set top box digital video v recorder etc OPTICAL 1 GAME 1 Game consoles v OPTICAL 2 TV CD TV CD player v 5 ETHERNET Router 4 1 5 6 6 MONITOR OUT TV projector etc 7 BD DVD IN Blu ray Disc DVD player CBL SAT IN Satellite cable set top box DiGi m e Le STB DVR IN Set top box digital video mue recorder et 5 GAME 1 IN Game console RI dock PC IN Personal computer TV CD IN TV CD player cassette tape deck MD CD R Turntable 4 RI dock PHONO IN Turntable 4 Ly To be continued En19 Q GND screw No Jack Port Components 7 COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT TV projector etc IN 1 BD DVD Blu ray Disc DVD player W RI dock IN 2 CBL SAT Satellite cable set top box W RI dock etc ZONE 2 OUT TV projector etc IN 5 Personal computer Note Sil Do not connect the AV receiver s USB port to a USB port on your computer Music on your computer cannot be played through the AV receiver in this way Only the front panel USB input is compa
113. ONKYO AV RECEIVER TX NRTOTO Instruction Manual Made for S iPod iPhone Radio Contents Safety Information and Introduction 2 Table of Contents 6 COMMEcuons cascos ur 13 Turning On amp Basic Operations 23 Advanced 54 Controlling Other Components 88 be A O 97 Internet Radio Guide Remote Control Codes WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL WARNING AVIS RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE DO NOT OPEN NE PAS OUVRIR The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the AN presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance A Important Safety Instructions Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instruc
114. Output The on screen information appears on the TV screen in Zone 2 by connecting the TV to HDMI OUT ZONE 2 of the AV receiver with HDMI cable The AV receiver allows you to enjoy the composite video and HDMI audio video in Zone 2 by connecting the TV of Zone 2 to the respective output jacks Main room TV AV receiver Zone 2 TV A 84 V Advanced Operations Note If you use HDMI OUT ZONE 2 make sure to set Zone 2 HDMI to Use gt page 60 Video and audio signals from an HDMI input will be output to HDMI OUT ZONE 2 The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video of components con nected to composite video only The information of connected component appears on a TV in Zone 2 by pressing DISPLAY Controlling Multi Zone Components Bi Operating on the AV receiver Input selector buttons MASTER VOLUME ZONE 3 ZONE 2 OFF Tip The Whole House Mode function shares the input source of main room with Multi Zone gt page 52 1 To turn on Zone 2 3 and select an input source press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 followed by an input selector button within 8 seconds Zone 2 3 turns on the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on the AV receiver s display Tip The corresponding trigger output goes high 12 V To select AM or FM press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 and the TUNER input selector repeatedly To select the same source as
115. See the previous section 2 While holding down MEMORY press TUNING MODE The preset is deleted and its number disappears from the AV receiver s display Listening to HD Radio Stations North American models HD Radio technology brings digital radio to conventional analog AM and FM radio stations with improved sound quality better reception and new data services HD Radio technology provides CD quality sound for FM stations and FM quality sound for AM stations In addition FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs on the same frequency by using multicast channels Text data display includes station name song title artist name and so on For more information about HD Radio technology visit www ibiquity com www hdradio com About HD Radio Stations HD Radio stations broadcast on the same AM and FM frequencies they ve always used and you can receive them by tuning into your favorite station as normal If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio technology the HD Radio indicator lights up When an HD Radio transmission is received the HD SPS indicator appears or HD Radio appears on the display f the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio technology the station s name will be displayed instead of the band and frequency When music data is received song title and artist name information will be displayed next to the HD indicator f the current HD Radio station support
116. Setup page 39 Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with the built in test tone so that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listening position E Left Front Wide Left Front High Left Center Front High Right Front Wide Right Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left gt 12 0dB to 0 0dB to 12 0dB in 0 5 dB steps E Subwoofer 1 1 Subwoofer 2 gt 15 0dB to 0 0dB to 12 0dB in 0 5 dB steps Note These settings cannot be calibrated when the AV receiver is muted Speakers that you set to No or None in Speaker Configuration cannot be selected page 64 When the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes and Zone 2 is turned on the surround back and front high speakers cannot be used When the Powered Zone 3 setting is set to Yes and Zone 3 is turned on the surround speakers cannot be used The test tone is output at the standard level for THX which is 0 dB absolute volume setting 82 If you normally listen at volume settings below this be careful because the test tone will be much louder 1 For the center speaker and subwoofer the level settings made by using the Quick Setup are saved in this menu gt page 56 2 If the Subwoofer setting is set to Ich this setting cannot be selected gt page 64 Tip If you re using a handheld sound level meter adjust the level of each speaker so tha
117. TE MODE Tuttavia tali tasti fungono anche da tasti del selettore d ingresso quindi scegliere un tasto REMOTE MODE che corrisponda all ingresso al quale viene collegato il dispositivo Per esempio se si collega il lettore CD all ingresso CD scegliere il TV CD quando si immette il relativo codice telecomando Entro 30 secondi utilizzare i tasti numerici per inserire il codice telecomando a 5 cifre Il tasto REMOTE MODE l indicatore Remote lampeggia due volte Se il codice telecomando non viene inserito correttamente il tasto REMOTE MODE lindicatore Remote lampeggia lentamente una volta Note L elemento lampeggiante del telecomando varia a seconda del modello del ricevitore AV Il telecomando preconfigurato con preselezioni per diversi apparecchi Inserendo un codice dall elenco dei codici telecomando possibile attivare la relativa preselezione per tale apparecchio Se sono presenti pi codici relativi allo stesso produttore provare a inserirli uno a uno finch non si arrivi al codice corrispondente dell apparecchio A seconda del modello e dell anno dell apparecchio la compatibilit non garantita e Con alcuni modelli il telecomando pu non funzionare o la sua compatibilit pu essere limitata a una parte della funzionalit dell apparecchio noltre non possibile aggiungere nuovi codici alle preselezioni esistenti del telecomando codici telecomando specificati sono validi alla data della stampa de
118. TV CE PIG WEEE gt REMOTE MODE CEP gt on APE SUR A STE N E TB A ET REMOTE MODE 8 gt AIR BRE CD HMS CO ARE gt A EPS TV CD E 30 BA gt A 5 MEA RA gt REMOTE MODE PARN PEL RIEA Tr E AREE EVE A SERE gt REMOTE MODE ERSTE JASH EPS fer pepe PEK ER AV BEE ENTSTEHT TIEREN TREE TERRA A a AnS gt FT BA ea NANTERRE AS pea RAE ES BL gt EEL Fak ST RATE ME gt AR ZA EEA gt ERRE RAR BEM RH PERS D S RUE ERI EN gt Taf ls RE TIS PERS TECH ESR Fr fe PERSE CEA SC APE E BRER n BE SHEET EMEN Remote Control Codes ES VE 1 ESS MRAD T REMOTE MODE GERR FRENAN fit DISPLAY Em AU 3 ED REMOTE MODE CEFER TAL Fee tegra Ph LMHS FEA fill Remote Mode EEE XO ZEN Display CER fall VER RECEIVER CHA AIS De eH AN Be n AN 103 o TV CHRL MA BALE ZE BR RECEIVER J CAD RU POBREZA AE REMOTE MODE ERAS FH ET EE RRA FPE AGE REA IG EL DS IL ERREUR RTE REN AGREE REMOTE MODE GPA He flan SEK CD TENUES CD An NEAR TV CD CHX CD 30 MOA FAAFIA 5 TEE RAT REMOTE MODE 920 44H ARIK BRAS EMA A A E TG REMOTE MODE 0 TEL PET BEM TX VER EE AV BT RAIN AT ICS A IH EPA AS ad PAS HE TT TREO XU
119. XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup has been performed Bi Noise can be heard When you play source material that contains no information in the LFE channel the subwoofer produces no sound Make sure the speakers are configured correctly 64 E There s no sound with a certain signal format Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power cords speaker cables and the like may degrade the audio performance so refrain from doing it An audio cable may be picking up interference Try repositioning your cables E The Late Night function doesn t work Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device On some game consoles such as those that support DVD the default setting is off With some DVD Video discs you need to select an audio output format from a menu Depending on the input signal some listening modes 42 49 cannot be selected E Can t select the Pure Audio listening mode The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected while Zone 2 3 is on En98 Y Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital 56 Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD Make sure that the TrueHD Loudness 69 Management setting is not set to Off The Late Night function doesn t work when this setting is disabled About DTS signals When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream stops the AV receiver remains in DTS listening mode and the dts indicator
120. Y Appendix Connection Tips and Video Signal Path The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment The format you choose will depend on the formats supported by your components Use the following sections as a guide The on screen setup menus appear only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN If your TV is connected to other video outputs use the AV receiver s display when changing settings Video Connection Formats Video components can be connected by using any one of the following video connection formats composite video PC IN Analog RGB component video or HDMI the latter offering the best picture quality The AV receiver can upconvert between video formats depending on the Monitor Out setting page 60 which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI output Tip For optimal video performance THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconversion e g component video input passing through to component video output To by pass the upconversion set the Picture Mode setting to Direct gt page 75 E Monitor Out set to HDMI Main or HDMI Sub Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as shown with composite video PC IN Analog RGB and component video sources all being upconverted for the HDMI output Use these settings if you
121. a koden inom 30 sekunder REMOTE MODE knapp Fj rrindikatorlampa blinkar tv g nger Om fj rrkontrollkoden inte st lldes in blinkar REMOTE MODE knappen fj rrindikatorn l ngsamt en g ng Anm rkningar Det blinkande elementet p fj rrkontrollen skiljer sig t beroende p din modell av AV receiver Fj rrkontrollen har f rkonfigurerats med f rvalda kanaler p fj rrkontrollen f r olika komponenter Genom att ange en kod fr n fj rrkontrollkodlistan kan du aktivera relevanta f rvalda kanaler f r den utrustningen Nar det finns flera olika koder for en tillverkare ska du f rs ka att ange dem en och en tills de st mmer verens med din utrustning Beroende p utrustningens modell och rg ng g r det inte att garantera kompatibilitet P vissa modeller kan det h nda att fj rrkontrollen inte fungerar eller s kan dess kompatibilitet vara begr nsad till en del av utrustningens funktion Dessutom g r det inte att l gga till nya koder till fj rrkontrollens existerande f rvalda kanaler ven om erh llna fj rrkontrollkoder r korrekta vid tryckningen kan de ndras av tillverkaren XE PES 1 HERBE REMOTE MODE RRR HR gt PSHE DISPLAY 87 3H e REMOTE MODE PARR PES SEPERATE TEI Integra RIEME HGH RAB PIM Remote Mode EPIR Displays HET ER RECEIER BIER MERA REA A EI TV CERDO HE EEE gt RECEIVER BEINEN
122. a los d as que quedan de la prueba Una vez que termine el periodo de prueba si desea seguir escuchando este servicio deber contratarlo para suscribirse vaya a www siriusxm com internetradio con su ordenador Cuando se suscriba recibir un nombre de usuario y una contrase a que deber introducir en el receptor de AV Para poder utilizar SiriusXM Internet Radio el receptor de AV debe estar conectado a internet Para usar el mando a distancia siga este procedimiento 1 Utilice A V para seleccionar Sign In y luego pulse ENTER Si ya tiene una cuenta SIRIUS puede acceder seleccionando Sign In Escriba su nombre de usuario y contrase a en la pantalla de teclado que aparece a continuaci n o en la configuraci n web Si no sabe su nombre de usuario o la contrase a llame a Sirius XM al n mero 888 539 7474 para solicitar asistencia Consejo Si desea utilizar m ltiples cuentas de usuario consulte Uso de m ltiples cuentas gt p gina 1 Se puede iniciar sesi n desde la pantalla Users E Utilizaci n de la pantalla de teclado 1 Utilice A W y ENTER para introducir su nombre de usuario y su contrase a 2 Seleccione OK 3 Pulse ENTER Aparecer la pantalla Confirm your entries 4 Pulse ENTER Aparecer Please wait y despu s la pantalla SiriusXM Internet Radio que muestra la categor a disponible para la selecci n 2 Utilice Y para selecci
123. accurate results E First measurement position Also referred to as the Main Listening Position this refers to the most central position where one would normally sit within the listening environment Audyssey MultEQ XT32 uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance level polarity and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer E Second eighth measurement positions These are the other listening positions i e the places where the other listeners will sit You can measure up to eight positions 8 8 8 lg 000 0 CCE D Le y Listening area D to Listening position En39 Y Turning On amp Basic Operations Note Make the room as quiet as possible Background noise and Radio Frequency Interference RFI can disrupt the room measurements Close windows televisions radios air conditioners fluorescent lights home appliances light dimmers or other devices Turn off the cell phone even if it is not in use or place it away from all audio electronics The microphone picks up test tones played through each speaker as Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup runs Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup cannot be performed while a pair of headphones is connected 1 2 Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV On the TV select the input to which the AV rece
124. ademarks of MHL LLC in the United States and other counties Apple TV is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries A En 117 V Specifications Amplifier Section Rated Output Power All channels North American 140 watts minimum continuous power per channel 8 ohm loads 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz with a maximum total harmonic distortion of 0 05 FTC European 7 ch x 200 W at 6 ohms 1 kHz 1 ch driven of 1 IEC Dynamic Power EC60268 Short term maximum output power 320 W 3 Q Front 270 W 4 Q Front 160 W 8 Q Front THD N Total Harmonic Distortion Noise 0 05 20 Hz 20 kHz half power 60 Front 1 kHz 8 Q Input Sensitivity and Impedance Unbalance 200 mV 47 kQ LINE 2 5 mV 47 kQ PHONO MM Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance 1 V 470 Q PRE OUT Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance 5 5 V 470 Q PRE OUT 70 mV MM 1 kHz 0 5 Direct 5 Hz 100 kHz 1 dB 3 dB Direct mode Tone Control Characteristics x10 dB 50 Hz BASS 10 dB 20 kHz TREBLE 110 dB LINE IHF A 80 dB PHONO MM IHF A 40 160 Damping Factor Phono Overload Frequency Response Signal to Noise Ratio Speaker Impedance Video Section Input Sensitivity Output Level and Impedance 1 Vp p 75 Q Component Y 0 7 Vp p 75 Q Component PR CR 1 Vp p 75 Q Composite Component Video Frequency Response 5 Hz 100 MHz 0 dB 3 dB Tuner
125. adio verwenden Profile Sie k nnen Titel aus Recently Listened Tracks Library und Neighbours wiedergeben Account Info Best tigen Sie Ihre Kontoinformation Sign Out Zur Abmeldung aus Ihrem Konto 3 Verwenden Sie A V um einen Sender auszuw hlen und dann dr cken Sie ENTER oder gt um die Wiedergabe zu starten Die Wiedergabe wird gestartet und die Wiedergabeanzeige erscheint Aktivierte Tasten B Ml gt gt B Men symbole I Love this track Titel Informationen werden auf dem Last fm Server gespeichert und die H ufigkeit der Wiedergabe wird erh ht Ban this track Titel Informationen werden auf dem Last fm Server gespeichert und die H ufigkeit der Wiedergabe wird verringert Add to My Favorites F gt einen Sender zu meiner My Favorites Liste hinzu B Scrobbling Steuerung verwenden Verwenden Sie A V um Enable auszuw hlen und dann dr cken Sie ENTER Von Drittparteien zur Verf gung gestellte Internetradio Dienste k nnen unter Umst nden ohne Vorank ndigung eingestellt werden In bestimmten Gebieten sind Internetradio Dienste eventuell nicht verf gbar Y1112 1 2940122 9 Remote Control Codes DISPLAY O Remote Control Codes 1 While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a code press and hold down DISPLAY about 3 seconds The REMOTE MODE button Remote indicator lights On Integra products button names
126. aewoo E E gt BEP 11037 10037 10208 10634 10499 12098 E max 11324 Att Mito 11585 Brandt 10625 10714 10560 Dansai 10037 10208 Easy Living 11666 11709 10037 Brimax 11703 Dantax 10714 11037 10715 ECE 10037 Astra 10037 Brinkmann 10037 10668 11652 Elbe 10556 10037 ATD 10698 Brionvega 10037 Datsura 10208 Electrograph 11755 Atlantic 10037 Bush 10556 10037 10714 Dawa 10037 Audiosonic 10037 10714 10715 10668 11037 10698 2226 11886 M 10208 11585 11652 Dayton Ho Elfunk 11037 Audiovox 11667 12719 De Graaf 10208 ELG 10037 Audioword 10698 Byd sign 12140 12209 DEC 11709 Elin 10037 Aventura IDE Camper 10037 Decca 10037 Elite 10037 ARM 10714 Carad 10668 11037 Denver 10037 11709 Emerson 10178 10171 10037 Baird 10208 Garena 10037 Desmet 10037 10714 10668 11394 Bang amp Olufsen 10565 Carrefour 10037 Diamant 10037 11864 11886 Barco 10556 Cascade 10037 Diamond 10698 Envision 11365 11506 Epson 11379 11 y Ae Remote Control Codes Television Television Television Television Erres 10037 Genesis 10037 Hisense 10556 10508 10208 ITV 10037 ESA 10171 Genexxa 10037 11363 12098 JGC 11709 ESC 10037 GFM 10171 11864 1
127. age for the Onscreen Setup Menus This step determines the language used for the onscreen setup menus See Language in OSD Setup 2 page 79 Tip Pressing HOME will close the setup wizard To restart the initial setup select Initial Setup in the Hardware Setup menu gt page 82 After selecting the language for on screen setup menus a welcome screen is displayed Initial Setup Welcome to initial setup Have you connected all the speakers and devices Before starting please connect speakers and sources Now would you like to start initial setup 1st Step Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Auto Setup 2nd Step Source Connection 3rd Step Remote Mode Setup 4th Step Network Connection Yes No HOME Exit Use A V on the AV receiver or remote controller to select one of the following options and then press ENTER gt Yes Continues to Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Auto Setup gt No Skips the settings and terminates the initial setup The setup wizard goes to Terminating the Initial Setup gt page 25 You can always restart the initial setup by selecting Initial Setup in the Hardware Setup menu 2 page 82 En24 V Turning On amp Basic Operations Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Auto Setup This step performs the automatic speaker setup 1 Use A F to select one of the following options and then press ENTER gt Do it Now The automatic speaker setup is performed following i
128. ake sure the Onkyo component is connected with an RI cable and an analog audio cable RCA See Connecting Onkyo RI Components for details gt page 22 2 Enter the appropriate remote control code for a REMOTE MODE button by referring to the previous section gt 42157 Onkyo cassette tape deck with RI 81993 Onkyo Dock with RI 3 Press the REMOTE MODE button point the remote controller at the AV receiver and operate the component Controlling Onkyo components without RI If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing the remote controller directly at it or you want to control an Onkyo component that s not connected via RI use the following remote control codes gt 30627 Onkyo DVD player without RI gt 71817 Onkyo CD player without RI 32900 33100 33500 Onkyo Blu ray Disc player 32901 33104 33504 Onkyo HD DVD player gt 70868 Onkyo MD recorder without RI gt 71323 Onkyo CD recorder without RI gt 82990 Onkyo Dock without RI Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default remote control code 1 While holding down the REMOTE MODE button that you want to reset press and hold down HOME until the REMOTE MODE button lights about 3 seconds 2 Within 30 seconds press the REMOTE MODE button again The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice indicating that the button has been reset Each REMOTE MODE button is preprogrammed with a remote control code Wh
129. allows an ARC capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver To use this function you must select the TV CD input selector and your TV must be ARC capable Default setting Note This setting is fixed to when the HDMI Control RIHD setting is set to Off This setting is set to Auto automatically when the HDMI Control RIHD setting is set to On for the first time If you set Audio Return Channel to Auto the Audio Selector settings of the TV CD input selector will be automatically switched to ARC page 77 After changing the settings of the HDMI Control RIHD HDMI Through or Audio Return Channel turn off the power on all connected pieces of equipment and then turn them on again Refer to the user s manuals for all connected pieces of equipment E Lip Sync Off gt On This function allows the AV receiver to automatically correct any delay between the video and the audio based on the data from the connected monitor Note This function works only if your HDMI compatible TV supports HDMI Lip Sync Ae BInstaPrevue These settings apply to InstaPrevue of the Home menu gt page 50 and specify the preview display of HDMI video streams Sub Window Multi Displays preview thumbnails all at once Single Displays preview thumbnails one by one With this setting you can set the n
130. an adjust the brightness of the AV receiver s display and switch the MASTER VOLUME indicator off and on in conjunction Press RECEIVER once followed by DIMMER repeatedly to cycle through the following patterns Normal brightness indicator off Dim brightness indicator off Dimmer brightness indicator off Normal brightness indicator on default Tip North American models Alternatively you can use DIMMER on the AV receiver Displaying Source Information You can display various information about the current input source as follows 1 Press RECEIVER once followed by DISPLAY repeatedly to cycle through the available information Tip Alternatively you can use DISPLAY on the AV receiver The following information can be typically displayed Input source Listening mode Signal format Sampling frequency Input signal resolution Output resolution 1 Tf the input signal is digital the signal format is displayed Information is displayed for about three seconds then the previously displayed information reappears 51 V Turning On amp Basic Operations Changing the Input Display When you connect fAl capable Onkyo component you must configure the input display so that RI can work properly This setting can be done only from the front panel 1 2 Press TV CD or GAME1 TV CD or G
131. an be used accurate playback of game audio which is often mixed similarly to movies but in a THX Founded by George Lucas THX develops smaller environment THX Loudness Plus stringent standards that ensure movies are is configured for game audio levels with reproduced in movie theaters and home Timbre Maiching active theaters just as the director intended THX Modes carefully optimize the tonal and Dolby Pro Logic IIIIx 7 Movie THX 5 2 spatial characteristics of the soundtrack for Cinema reproduction in the home theater Dolby Pro Logic II IIx 7 Music THX environment They can be used with 2 Music channel matrixed and multichannel sources Dolby Pro Logic II IIx 7 Game THX Surround back speaker output depends on Games the source material and the selected listening The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II IIx mode and THX Cinema Music Games modes can be used The PLIVPLIIx and THX indicators light on the AV receiver s display Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie THX 7 2 SB Cinema pda 9 2 SB FH Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music THX Music En 48 Y The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx and THX Cinema Music modes can be used The PLIIx and THX indicators light on the AV receiver s display Turning On amp Basic Operations Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Source Layout Source Layout Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height THX GE
132. an uw component is de compatibiliteit niet gegarandeerd Bij sommige modellen werkt de afstandsbediening mogelijk niet of is de compatibiliteit ervan beperkt tot een deel van de functionaliteit van de component Daarnaast is het niet mogelijk om nieuwe codes aan de bestaande voorkeuzetoetsen van de afstandsbediening toe te voegen Hoewel de gegeven afstandsbedieningscodes correct zijn op het moment van afdrukken kunnen deze door de fabrikant gewijzigd worden Remote Control Codes Fj rrstyrningskoder 1 Hall ned knappen f r det REMOTE MODE som du vill tilldela en kod samtidigt som du trycker och h ller ned DISPLA Y i cirka 3 sekunder REMOTE MODE knapp Fj rrindikatorlampa P Integra produkter r knappnamnens begynnelsebokstav en versal Till exempel Fj rrl ge knapp och Display knapp Anm rkningar Fj rrkontrollkoder kan inte anges for knapparna RECEIVER och flerzonsknappen Endast fj rrkontrollkoder f r tv kan anges f r TV F rutom RECEIVER TV och flerzonsknappen kan fj rrkontrollkoder f r vilken som helst kategori tilldelas f r knapparna REMOTE MODE Dessa knappar fungerar dock ven som ing ngv ljarknappar sa anv nd en knapp f r REMOTE MODE som motsvarar ing ngen som du ansluter utrustningen till Till exempel om du ansluter din CD spelare till CD ing ngen ska du v lja TV CD n r du anger dess fj rrkontrollkod Anv nd sifferknapparna f r att ange den femsiffrig
133. anese 39 Using the Automatic Speaker 39 Using the Listening Modes 42 Using the Home Menu Using the Sleep Timer Setting the Display Brightness 51 Displaying Source Information 51 Changing the Input Display Using the Whole House Mode is Selecting Speaker 52 Muting the AV 52 Using Headphones ES Using Easy Macros Advanced Operations On screen Sets 54 Using the Quick Setup 54 Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup 85 Using the Setup Menu HOME 58 About the HYBRID STANDBY Indicator 59 setup Menu unse 59 Input Output Assign 60 Speaker Setup 8 Audio Adjust 68 Source Setup m Listening Mode Preset ud VIE IET T 78 Hardware Setup 79 Remote Controller Setup 82 Lock 82 Safety Information and Introduction Multi LOA iiaa aaae aranana aaa aaa 83 Making Multi Zone Connections 83 Controlling Multi Zone Components 85 Using the Remote Controller in Zone and Multiroom Control Kits 86 Contro
134. ar las cuentas de usuario el acceso se realiza desde la pantalla Users Uso de Rhapsody s lo 3 1 Pulse MENU cuando aparezca la pantalla de usuarios Aparecer n los siguientes elementos del ment Add new user Nota Los servicios disponibles pueden variar de una regi n a otra Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio solo 1 Pulse NET Norteam rica 4 a Remove this user Aparecer una lista de los servicios de red y se Rae M Puede guardar una nueva cuenta de usuario o borrar iluminar el indicador NET Si parpadea verifique a E una existente que el cable Ethernet est firmemente conectado al Uso de Last fm Internet Radio 5 receptor de AV Consejo 2 Seleccione el servicio deseado y pulse ENTER m PR 2 EIU E de Algunos de los servicios no permiten el uso de multiples Aparecer la p gina principal del servicio Brandon d Uso de Slacker Personal Radio 6 seleccionado Puede guardar hasta 10 cuentas de usuario Para cambiar entre cuentas debe antes cerrar sesi n en la cuenta actual y acceder de nuevo en la pantalla Users Es1 V Pandora Internet Radio Primeros pasos solo EE UU Pandora es un servicio de radio por Internet gratuito y personalizado que reproduce la m sica que usted conoce y le ayudar a descubrir m sica que le encantar 1 Ut
135. are capitalized For example Remote Mode button and Display button Notes Remote control codes cannot be entered for RECEIVER and the multi zone button Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV Except for RECEIVER TV and the multi zone button remote control codes from any category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons However these buttons also work as input selector buttons so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input to which you connect your component For example if you connect your CD player to the CD input choose TV CD when entering its remote control code Within 30 seconds use the number buttons to enter the 5 digit remote control code The REMOTE MODE button Remote indicator flashes twice If the remote control code is not entered successfully the REMOTE MODE button Remote indicator will flash once slowly Notes The flashing element of the remote controller will differ according to your AV receiver s model The remote controller is preconfigured with remote controller presets of different components By entering a code from the Remote Control Code list you can activate the relevant preset for that component When there are multiple codes related to one manufacturer try and enter them one by one until it matches your component Depending on the model and year of your component compatibility is not guaranteed With some models the remote co
136. ass standard which allows USB devices to be connected to computers without the need for special drivers or software Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB Mass Storage Class standard Refer to your USB MP3 player s instruction manual for details Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be played Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or damage to data stored on a USB device when that device is used with the AV receiver We recommend that you back up your important music files beforehand MP3 players containing music files that are managed with special music software are not supported Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices which includes the ability to power them Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub The USB device must be connected directly to the AV receiver s USB port f the USB device contains a lot of data the AV receiver make take a while to read it USB devices with security functions cannot be played 5 Supported Audio File Formats For server playback and playback from a USB device the AV receiver supports the following music file formats Variable bit rate VBR files are supported However playback times may not display correctly Note With remote playback the AV receiver does not support the following music file formats FLAC Ogg Vorbis DSD and Dolby TrueHD n the case of server playback the above mentioned file formats may not
137. ateur et votre mot de passe 2 S lectionnez OK 3 Appuyez sur ENTER L cran Confirm your entries s affiche 4 Appuyez sur ENTER Conseil Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur consultez Utilisation de plusieurs comptes page 1 L identification peut tre r alis e partir de l cran Users 2 Utilisez A V pour s lectionner le menu puis appuyez sur ENTER Search Vous pouvez rechercher des morceaux par artiste par album ou par piste Music Guide Vous pouvez lire des pistes partir des genres des meilleurs artistes des meilleurs albums des meilleures pistes des nouveaut s et des s lections du personnel Rhapsody Channels coutez les canaux de radio programm e par les meilleurs diteurs de Rhapsody Playlists Permet de jouer vos listes de lecture personnelles My Library Marquez vos albums et vos pistes personnelles dans le catalogue de Rhapsody l aide de My Library Account Info V rifiez les informations de votre compte Sign Out D connectez vous de votre compte Rhapsody Fre V Utilisation d une webradio 3 Utilisez A Y pour s lectionner un canal puis appuyez sur ENTER ou pour d marrer la lecture La lecture d bute et l cran de lecture s affiche Vous pouvez contr lez les pistes avec les touches sur la t l commande Boutons activ s B II Bl lt lt gt gt 4 gt gt RANDOM REPEAT
138. bedieningscodes worden ingevoerd voor RECEIVER en de multi zone toets Alleen TV afstandsbedieningscodes kunnen worden ingevoerd voor TV Behalve voor RECEIVER TV en de multi zone toets kunnen afstandsbedieningscodes vanuit elke categorie worden toegewezen aan de REMOTE MODE toetsen Deze toetsen werken overigens ook als ingangsselectortoetsen kies dus een REMOTE MODE toets die overeenkomt met de ingang waarop u uw component wilt aansluiten Kies indien u bijvoorbeeld uw CD speler aansluit op de CD ingang de TV CD toets bij het invoeren van de afstandsbedieningscode Gebruik binnen 30 seconden de cijfertoetsen om de 5 cijferige afstandsbedieningscode in te voeren De toets REMOTE MODE afstandsbedieningsmodus Het indicatielampje afstandsbediening knippert tweemaal Indien de afstandsbedieningscode niet met succes wordt ingevoerd zal de toets REMOTE MODE Remote indicator eenmaal traag knipperen Opmerkingen Het knippergedeelte van de afstandsbediening zal verschillen ten opzichte van het model van uw AV receiver De afstandsbediening is voorgeprogrammeerd met voorkeuzetoetsen van verschillende componenten Door het invullen van een code uit de afstandsbediening codelijst kunt u de voorkeuzetoets voor die component activeren Wanneer er meerdere codes gerelateerd zijn aan n fabrikant probeer deze dan een voor een totdat de juiste code overeenkomt met uw component Afhankelijk van het model en het bouwjaar v
139. ble Surround Bass Surround Back Treble Surround Back Bass Subwoofer Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer 2 Center Dolby Volume Audyssey Dynamic EQ 2 3 Dynamic Volume 2 3 Late Night Music Optimizer Re EQ Re EQ THX and Screen Centered Dialog B Video You can change the following settings Wide Mode and Picture Mode 5 See also Picture Adjust page 74 E Information s You can view the information of the following items Audio Video and Tuner 5 E Listening Mode gt You can select the listening modes that are grouped in the following categories MOVIE TV MUSIC GAME and THX Use A V to select the category and 4 to select the listening mode Press ENTER to switch to the selected listening mode Note 1 The video preview is not displayed when HDMI IN 5 6 7 8 is the current HDMI input source or Nosignal is present on the current input source or The Zone 2 HDMI setting is set to Use gt page 60 The video of the currently selected input is displayed on the main screen not on a preview thumbnail 2 Dolby Volume Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume cannot be selected when any of the THX listening modes is selected with Loudness Plus set to On or Preserve THX Settings set to Yes gt page 67 8 When
140. blicidad Last fm es una forma excelente de descubrir m sica Cree hoy mismo una cuenta gratuita de Last fm en www last fm join Si se suscribe podra disfrutar de lo mejor de Last fm Radio sin anuncios en su receptor de AV Onkyo sin necesidad de un ordenador Recommended Radio Descubra nuestras interesantes recomendaciones personalizadas que se adaptan a sus gustos en cada momento Artist Radio Escoja cualquier artista y podra escuchar una emisora de radio inspirada exclusivamente en su elecci n My Library Rel jese y disfrute de selecciones de toda la musica que ha escuchado desde que se registr en Last fm Tag Radio Polish funk Death pop Piense en un estilo y podr escucharlo durante horas Pru belo gratis ahora mismo Cree una cuenta y ver por s mismo lo que significa tener toda la m sica del mundo al alcance de sus o dos Puede consultar los precios actualizados y toda la informaci n que desee en www last fm subscribe 1 Utilice A V para seleccionar Sign in to your account y luego pulse ENTER Si ya tiene una cuenta de Last fm puede acceder a ella para seleccionar Sign in to your account Introduzca su nombre de usuario y contrase a en la siguiente pantalla de teclado E Utilizaci n de la pantalla de teclado 1 Utilice A lt 4 gt y ENTER para introducir su nombre de usuario y su contrase a 2 Seleccione OK 3 Pulse ENTER Aparecer la pantalla Confirm your entries
141. bsite besuchen k nnen Sie Ihre pers nlichen Charts der von Ihnen abgespielten Musik anzeigen teilen Sie diese mit Freunden und sehen Sie auch welche Musik Ihre Freunde m gen Mit tausenden von Biografien Rezensionen und einer schier endlosen Auswahl an pers nlich angepassten werbefreien Radiosendern ist Last fm eine groBartige Gelegenheit um Musik zu entdecken Holen Sie sich Ihr kostenloses Last fm Konto noch heute unter www last fm join Nur f r GroBbritannien und Deutschland Holen Sie sich ein Abonnement und Sie k nnen auch ohne Computer die besten werbefreien Last fm Radiosender auf Ihrem Onkyo AV Receiver h ren Recommended Radio Entdecken Sie smarte pers nlich angepasste Empfehlungen die sich mit Ihrem Musikgeschmack ver ndern Artist Radio W hlen Sie einen beliebigen Interpreten und wir spielen f r Sie einen ganzen Radiosender mit durch Ihre Wahl inspirierter Musik My Library Lehnen Sie sich zur ck und erfreuen Sie sich an einer Auswahl aller Musik die Sie seit Ihrer Mitgliedschaft bei Last fm geh rt haben Tag Radio Polish Funk Death Pop Denken Sie an einen Musikstil und wir unterhalten Sie stundenlang damit Starten Sie Ihr kostenloses Probeabo direkt wenn Sie Ihr Konto erstellen und finden Sie selbst heraus wie es ist jederzeit die Musik der ganzen Welt abrufen zu k nnen Die aktuellen Nutzungspreise und umfassende Infos sind unter www last fm subscribe erh ltlich SN 29401229 1 Verwe
142. c and videos can be shared through consumer electronics personal computers and mobile devices in and beyond the home The AV receiver complies with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines version 1 5 License and Trademark Information Appendix x v Color is a trademark of Sony Corporation Sdtsw dts Master Audio Neo X Manufactured under license under U S Patent No s 5 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 487 535 6 226 616 7 212 872 7 003 467 7 272 567 7 668 723 7 392 195 7 930 184 7 333 929 7 548 853 7 283 634 amp other U S and worldwide patents issued and pending DTS HD the Symbol amp DTS HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks amp DTS HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS Inc Product includes software ODTS Inc All Rights Reserved E gt N v hz c ole THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd which may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved DOIDOLBY QE TRUEIE PRO LOGIC 12 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic Surround EX and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Music Optimizer is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation THX Ultra2 Plus Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2 Plus certified it must pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 Plus logo which is your guarantee that th
143. ck on or off Also your iPod iPhone may not respond the first time you press this button in which case you should press it again This is because the remote controller transmits the On and Standby commands alternately so if your iPod iPhone is already on it will remain on when the remote controller transmits the On command Similarly if your iPod iPhone is already off it will remain off when the remote controller transmits the Off command 4 Resume mode With the Resume function you can resume playback of the song that was playing when you removed your iPod iPhone from the Onkyo DS A2 RI Dock Controlling Other Components You can use the AV receiver s remote controller to control your other AV components including those made by other manufacturers This section explains how to enter the remote control code for a component that you want to control DVD TV CD etc See Learning Commands for learning commands directly from another component s remote controller gt page 95 See Using Normal Macros for programming ACTIVITIES to perform a sequence of remote control actions gt page 96 Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes The following REMOTE MODE buttons are preprogrammed with remote control codes for controlling the components listed You do not need to enter a remote control code to control these components For details on controlling these components see the indicated pages BD DVD Onkyo Blu ray Disc player
144. connect either HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB of the AV receiver to your TV The composite video and component video outputs pass through their respective input signals as they are When you connect a video component to an HDMI or COMPONENT you must assign that input to an input selector gt pages 61 62 Video Signal Flow Chart Blu ray Disc DVD player etc Vv y y Composite PC IN Analog RGB Component HDMI AV receiver Composite Y Y y TV projector etc En 107 V Appendix Monitor Out set to Both Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as shown with composite video PC IN Analog RGB and component video sources all being upconverted for both HDMI outputs Use this setting if you connect both HDMI OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB of the AV receiver to your TV Note that video signals are output from both HDMI outputs at the resolution supported by both TVs The composite video and component video outputs pass through their respective input signals as they are When you connect a video component to an HDMI or COMPONENT you must assign that input to an input selector gt pages 61 62 Video Signal Flow Chart Blu ray Disc DVD player etc Vv v y Composite PC IN Component HDMI Analog RGB AV receiver MONITOR OUT Composite Component HDMI Y y yy TV projector etc Note When Monitor Out is set to
145. cord from the wall outlet wait five seconds or more then plug it in again E The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly The AV receiver will automatically enter standby 81 mode when Auto Standby has been set and launches E The AV receiver turns off and after restoring the power it turns off again The protection circuit has been activated Removethe 14 power cord from the wall outlet immediately Make sure that all speaker cables and input sources are properly connected and leave the AV receiver with its power cord disconnected for 1 hour After that reconnect the power cord and turn the power on If the AV receiver turns off again unplug the power cord and contact your Onkyo dealer Caution If CHECK SP WIRE appears on the AV receiver s display the speaker cables may be shorting WARNING If smoke smell or abnormal noise is produced by the AV receiver unplug the power cord from the wall outlet immediately and contact your Onkyo dealer En 97 Y Appendix Bi There s no sound or it s very quiet Make sure that the digital input source is selected properly Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed in all the way Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all components are connected properly Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is correct and that the bare wires are in contact with the metal part of each speaker terminal Make sure that the input source is properly sele
146. ct to change Remapping Colored Buttons You can change the configuration of colored buttons with which REMOTE MODE buttons are preset 1 While holding down the REMOTE MODE button that you want to program press and hold down A Red until the REMOTE MODE button lights about 3 seconds You can only change colored buttons for components whose codes belong to categories of the Remote Control Codes list BD DVD player TV cable set top box etc 2 Within 30 seconds press the colored buttons in the order that you want to reassign them The button presses are assigned to each button from left to right The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice indicating that the sequence has been successfully assigned If the sequence is not successfully assigned the REMOTE MODE button will flash once slowly Tip To reset the REMOTE MODE buttons to their default settings see Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons page 92 Note If any other button than the colored buttons is pressed the operation will be cancelled This operation cannot be done while the AV receiver is in Receiver mode or when ZONE 2 3 is active En91 V Controlling Other Components Remote Control Codes for Onkyo Components Connected via RI Onkyo components that are connected via RI are controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver not the component This allows you to control components that are out of view in a rack for example 1 M
147. cted System Off When you turn off the AV receiver the RI Dock turns off automatically A Enss Controlling Other Components Other Remote Operations You can use the remote controller that came with the AV receiver to control other iPod iPhone functions The available functionality depends on the AV receiver Note If you use your iPod iPhone with any other accessories iPod iPhone playback detection may not work iPod Alarm If you use the Alarm function on your iPod to start playback the AV receiver will turn on at the specified time and select your iPod as the input source automatically Note This linked operation won t work while a video is being played or when the sound set for the alarm is a built in sound Beep This linked operation won t work with models on which music files cannot be used to set the alarm sound Operating Notes Use the AV receiver s volume control to adjust the playback volume While your iPod iPhone is inserted in the RI Dock its volume control has no effect If you do adjust the volume control on your iPod iPhone while it s inserted in the RI Dock be careful that it s not set too loud before you reconnect your headphones Controlling Your iPod iPhone By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that s been programmed with the remote control code for your Dock you can control your iPod iPhone in the Dock with the buttons described further in this section See E
148. cted Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting Check the volume The AV receiver is designed for home theater enjoyment It has a wide volume range allowing precise adjustment If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the AV receiver s display press the remote controller s MUTING button to unmute the AV receiver While a pair of headphones is connected to the PHONES jack no sound is output from the speakers If there s no sound from a DVD player connected to an HDMI IN check the DVD player s output settings and be sure to select a supported audio format Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device On some game consoles such as those that support DVD the default setting is off With some DVD Video discs you need to select an audio output format from a menu If your turntable uses an MC cartridge you must connect an MC head amp or an MC transformer Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent twisted or damaged Not all listening modes use all speakers Specify the speaker distances and adjust the individual speaker levels Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not still connected Ae 63 17 18 22 14 26 14 52 52 42 65 If the input signal format is set to PCM or DTS 77 Set it to Off B Only the front speakers produce sound When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected 46 only the front speakers and subwoofer produce sou
149. cting Your Speakers Speaker Configuration The following table indicates the channels you should use depending on the number of speakers that you have No matter how many speakers you use 2 powered subwoofers are recommended for a really powerful and solid bass To get the best from your surround sound system you need to set the speaker settings automatically gt page 39 or manually gt page 64 Number of 2 3 4516777889919 10 11 speakers Front speakers vv vv Center speaker Y vvvvvvvvvvv v Surround vvvvvvvvvvvviv speakers Surround back v vv v speaker Surround back v vv v speakers Front high w vv wv speakers Front wide VW vvv v speakers 1 Tf you re using only one surround back speaker connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals Connections Connecting the Speaker Cables E 7 2 channel playback The following illustration shows how to connect the speakers to each pair of terminals If you re using only one surround back speaker connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals Select the speakers surround back front high front wide you want to use for 7 2 channel playback You can set which speakers you want to use by priority See Selecting Speaker Layout gt page 52 Front high Front wide right right Front wide Front high Front right Front left left left
150. d Super VGA 800 x 600 64 MB VRAM DirectX 9 0b Microsoft ActiveSync only when using a Windows Mobile based Pocket PC or smartphone Processor Memory Hard disk Drive Modem Sound card Monitor Video card Software Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or Netscape 7 1 E Remote playback Windows Media Player 12 DLNA certified within DLNA Interoperability Guidelines version 1 5 media server or controller device The setting varies depending on the media server or controller devices Refer to your devices instruction manual for details If the operating system of your personal computer is Windows 7 Windows Media Player 12 is already installed For more information see the Microsoft web site A En 115 V Appendix USB Device Requirements USB mass storage device class but not always guaranteed e FAT16 or FAT32 file system format If the storage device has been partitioned each section will be treated as an independent device Up to 20 000 folders can be displayed and folders may be nested up to 16 levels deep USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not supported Note If the media you connect is not supported the message No Storage will be displayed If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver s USB port we recommend that you use its AC adapter to power it The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support the USB Mass Storage Cl
151. dby gt page 81 A En23 Y Turning On amp Basic Operations Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps Initial Setup To ensure smooth operation here s a few easy steps to help you configure the AV receiver before you use it for the very first time These settings only need to be made once See Initial Setup for details page 24 If the Firmware Update Available window appears When a new version of the firmware is available the notification window Firmware Update Available pops up This notification only appears when the AV receiver is connected to your home network page 114 To perform the firmware update follow the instructions on screen Use A and ENTER on the AV receiver or remote controller to select one of the options gt Update Now Starts the firmware update Refer to Firmware Update gt page 103 gt Remind me Later The update notification will pop up again the next time you turn the AV receiver on gt Never Remind me Disables the automatic update notification Tip The update notification window can be enabled or disabled in Update Notice page 82 Initial Setup This section explains the settings that we recommend you to make before using the AV receiver for the very first time A setup wizard is launched upon first time use to let you perform those settings The on screen menus appear only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN Selecting the Langu
152. e buttons on the front panel unless otherwise specified Using the Tuner With the built in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio stations You can store your favorite stations as presets for quick selection You can also change the frequency steps page 79 1 Press TUNER to select either AM or FM In this example FM has been selected Each time you press TUNER the radio band changes between AM and FM Band Frequency Actual display depends on the country Tuning into Radio Stations E Auto tuning mode 1 Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator lights on the AV receiver s display 2 Press TUNING A Y Searching stops when a station is found When tuned into a station the TUNED indicator lights When tuned into a stereo FM station the FM STEREO indicator lights as shown TUNED 4 FM STEREO Tip Tuning into weak FM stereo stations If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak it may be impossible to get good reception In this case switch to manual tuning mode and listen to the station in mono B Manual tuning mode In manual tuning mode FM stations will be in mono 1 Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator goes off on the AV receiver s display 2 Press and hold TUNING 4 7 The frequency stops changing when you release the button Press the buttons repeatedly to change the frequency one step at a time En34 V Turning On amp Basic Opera
153. e Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come THX Ultra2 Plus requirements define hundreds of parameters including power amplifier performance and pre amplifier performance and operation for both digital and analog domains THX Ultra2 Plus receivers also feature proprietary THX technologies e g THX Mode which accurately translate movie soundtracks for home theater playback AUDYSSEY A AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT D DSX DYNAMIC VOLUME Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories Inc U S and foreign patents pending Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Audyssey Dynamic EQ Audyssey Dynamic Volume and Audyssey DSX are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories Inc HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation U S and Foreign Patents HD Radio and the HD HD Radio and Arc logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp DLNA the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks service marks or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies Qdeo and QuietVideo are trademarks of Marvell or its affiliates HQV Hollywood Quality Video is a trademark of Qualcomm Incorporated Xantech is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation Niles is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Cor
154. e buttons on the remote control Enabled buttons gt LE W lt lt gt gt lt lt gt gt RANDOM REPEAT Note On Rhapsody Channels some of the buttons don t work E Menu Items Add track to My Library Bookmark currently playing tracks Add album to My Library Bookmark currently playing albums Add playlist to My Library Bookmark currently playing playlists Add channel to My Channels Bookmark currently playing Rhapsody radio channels Add to My Favorites Adds a track channel or playlist to My Favorites list Tip You can remove bookmarked tracks albums and Rhapsody Channels from My Library Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio North American only Your Onkyo AV receiver includes a free trial of SiriusXM Internet Radio The Account Info screen shows how many days are left in your trial After the trial period expires if you want to continue listening to the service you must subscribe To subscribe go to www siriusxm com internetradio with your computer When you subscribe you will be provided with a username and password which has to be entered into the AV receiver To use SiriusXM Internet Radio you must have your AV receiver connected to the Internet Using the remote control follow these steps Use to select Sign In and then press ENTER If you have an existing SIRIUS account you can sign in by selecting Sign In Enter your user name and password in the next ke
155. e present at more than one input the inputs will be selected automatically in the following order of priority HDMI digital analog Audio Signal Flow Chart Blu ray Disc DVD player etc VV v y Analog Optical Coaxial HDMI AV receiver TV projector etc 1 Depends on the Audio TV Out setting gt page 80 2 This is possible when Audio Return Channel is set to Auto page 80 the TV CD input selector is selected and your TV is ARC capable Tip When a signal is input via HDMI and the corresponding input selector is selected the HDMI indicator lights In the case of an optical or coaxial connection the DIGITAL indicator lights If the analog audio is output or if neither HDMI nor digital signal inputs are assigned ANALOG indicator lights A En 109 Y Appendix Appendix Video Resolution Chart The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV receiver NTSC PAL Output available Output HDMI Component Composite Input 4K 2 1080p 24 1080p 1080i 720p 480p 576p 480i 576i 1080p 1080i 720p 480p 576p 480i 576i 480i 576i HDMI 1080p 24 v vi 1080p v v v4 1080i v v v w v 720p v v v v Yi 480p 576p W v v v v va 480i 576i v v v v v v v a Component 1080p v v W s v 1080i v v v5 v5 v v 720p v v v5 v5 45 v v 480p 576p v v v5 v5 v5 v5 v s v 6 v 480i 576i v v v5 v5 v5 Wis v5
156. eOpenWest 01877 Videotron 01877 AT amp T 00858 Numericable 02767 Ziggo 00660 01666 02015 VTR 01376 Bright House 01376 01877 Ono 01068 01562 02142 02447 02774 WideOpenWest 01877 BT Vision 02294 Optus 01060 Ziggo 02142 Cable amp Wireless 01068 Orange 00817 Cable PVR Combination Cable One 01376 01877 Pace 01376 01877 01068 Arris 02187 IPTV Cablecom 01582 01060 01982 Bright House 01376 01877 ADB 02254 02769 Cablevision 01376 01877 Panasonic 01488 01982 Cable One 01376 01877 Aon 02769 Charter 01376 01877 02187 Philips 00817 01582 02294 Cablevision 01376 01877 AT amp T 00858 i 2767 01877 00858 01982 PER Charter 01376 01877 02187 BT Vision 02294 02345 02378 Pioneer 01877 01500 Cisco 01877 01982 02657 00817 00660 01666 RCN 01376 Comcast 01376 01877 01982 Cisco 00858 02345 02378 02015 02447 Rogers 01877 02187 Kreatel 01385 Comcast 01376 01877 01982 Sagem 00817 Cox 01376 01877 mio TV 02802 22187 PINE 01877 01060 01666 PE 02187 Motorola 01376 00858 01998 Cox 01376 01877 02015 02774 A 01482 i Daeryung 01877 Scientific Atlanta 01877 00858 01982 Humax 02142 03051 03053 Neuf TV 03107 02345 a Digeo 02187 Insight 01376 01877 Pace 02657 DX Antenna 01500 SFR 03107 J COM 03051 03053 RENE Shaw 01376 gt Scientific Atlanta 00858 02345 France Telecom 00817 Knology 01877 SFR 03107 Freebox 01482 ingTel 01998 02802 Mediacom 01376 01877 SingTel 01998 028
157. eakers are connected to a receiver or integrated amplifier in Zone 2 3 use its volume control to adjust the volume Muting Zones Bi Operating on the remote controller 1 Press ZONE repeatedly and then press MUTING Tip Tounmute press ZONE followed by MUTING again Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume Note ZONE 2 LINE OUT and FRONT WIDE ZONE 2 L R output 2ch PCM and analog input sources To listen to the PCM source you need to make an HDMI connection gt page 18 If no sound is heard when an input source is selected check if the source is connected to an analog input and HDMI input Only analog input sources are output by the ZONE 3 LINE OUT and FRONT HIGH ZONE 3 L R terminals Digital input sources are not output If no sound is heard when an input source is selected verify that the source is connected to an analog input North American models You can select different radio stations for the main room and Zone 2 by connecting the supplied antennas respectively page 21 North American models When the main room and Zone 2 share the same input source if the input selector of the main room is TUNER you cannot select different radio stations for the main room and Zone 2 respectively European models You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your main room and Zone 2 3 The same AM FM radio station will be heard in each room Namely if you have selected an FM station for the main room
158. ed 5 You can specify the output resolution for HDMI OUT MAIN and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT so that the AV receiver upconverts the picture resolution as necessary to match the resolution supported by your TV Tip You can see the picture by pressing ENTER to check the Resolution setting for HDMI OUT MAIN excluding NET input source Note Depending on the incoming video signal the video playback may not be smooth or the vertical resolution may be lowered In this case select anything other than 1080p 24 With some TVs there may be no picture when this setting is set to 4K Upscaling If the Monitor Out setting is set to Sub this setting is fixed to Through If the Monitor Out setting is set to Both this setting is fixed to Auto 1 PC IN Analog RGB input signal is output at 480p 480p 576p 720p 1080i resolution when the Monitor Out setting is set to Analog page 60 and the Resolution setting is set to Through 2 These settings are not available when the Monitor Out setting is set to Analog page 60 HDMI Input If you connect a video component to an HDMI input you must assign that input to an input selector For example if you connect your Blu ray Disc DVD player to HDMI IN 2 you must assign HDMI2 to the BD DVD input selector If you ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an HDMI cable composite video and component
159. ed instead gt PCM Only 2 channel PCM format input signals will be heard If the input signal is not PCM the PCM indicator will flash and noise may also be produced gt DTS Only DTS but not DTS HD format input signals will be heard If the input signal is not DTS the dts indicator will flash and there will be no sound When HDMI COAXIAL or OPTICAL is selected in the Audio Selector setting you can then specify the signal type in Fixed Mode Normally the AV receiver detects the signal format automatically However if you experience either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS material you can manually set the signal format to PCM or DTS If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut off try setting the format to PCM f noise is produced when fast forwarding or reversing a DTS CD try setting the format to DTS Note The setting will be reset to Off when you change the setting in Audio Selector A En 77 V Advanced Operations Listening Mode Preset 6 e gt gt Setup gt MainMenu Listening Mode Preset You can assign a default listening mode to each input source that will be selected automatically when you select each input source For example you can set the default listening mode to be used with Dolby Digital input signals You can select other listening modes during playback but the mode specified here will be resumed once the AV receiver has be
160. edance gt 4ohms Select if the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but less than 6 gt 6ohms Select if the impedances of all speakers are between 6 and 16 ohms E Speakers Type Front Normal Select this if you ve connected your front speakers normally gt Bi Amp Select this if you ve bi amped your front speakers Digital Crossover Select this if you re using speakers without crossover network Tip If Speakers Type Front is set to Digital Crossover a confirmation screen appears Select Next 2 7 Digital Processing Crossover Network to display the screen for Digital Processing Crossover Network page 67 Continue with the settings E Powered Zone 2 Powered Zone 3 gt No gt Yes Zone 2 3 speakers can be used Powered Zone 2 3 enabled 5 Bi Preout to External Amplifier gt No gt Surr Back Front High Front Wide For 9 2 channel playback select the channel output by SB FH FW EXT AMP jacks If you select speakers whose setting in Speaker Configuration is set to None it will be automatically switched to 80Hz THX Note If the Speakers Type Front setting is set to Bi Amp or Digital Crossover Powered Zone 2 cannot be used When the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes and Zone 2 is turned on the surround back and front high speakers cannot be used When the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes the front wide spea
161. een as Stations By Genre Stations By Location etc This is where your favorite Internet radio bookmarks will be stored To register your favorite stations using a personal computer you need to connect your PC to the same network as the AV receiver Enter the ID MAC address of your unit on http onkyo vtuner com You can then register your favorite radio programs The ID is shown at the bottom of the vTuner Internet Radio top menu and the AV receiver s MAC address is shown on Network of the Setup menu gt page 81 Registering Other Internet Radio You need to connect the AV receiver to your home network page 114 The on screen information appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI outputs Internet radio URLs in the following formats are supported PLS M3U and podcast RSS However depending on the type of data or audio format used by the Internet radio station you may not be able to listen to some stations To listen to other Internet radio stations you must register your station in My Favorites of the network service screen as described below Note Services available may vary depending on the region See the separate instructions for more information 1 Select Network on the Setup menu to verify your IP address page 81 Take a note of the IP address On your computer start your web browser N Enter the AV receiver s IP address in the browser s Internet address URL f
162. eeters and woofers the wrong way around as this may damage your speakers With speakers without crossover network be careful NOT to set Speakers Type Front to Bi Amp as this may damage your speakers Make sure that this setting is set to Digital Crossover Confirm that your speakers are without crossover network by referring to your speaker manual Connecting speakers without crossover network provide a fine three dimensional sound field that extends bass and treble performance to the fullest extent When speakers without crossover network are used the AV receiver is able to drive up to a 5 2 speaker system in the main room You must enable Digital Crossover in Speakers Type Front gt page 63 and make the settings of Digital Processing Crossover Network gt page 67 Note You need to make the setting before connecting the speakers Tweeter high Woofer low Front right Front left 16 Y Connections Connecting a Power Amplifier If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier you can use the AV receiver as a preamp Connect all speaker outputs to the power amplifier See the manuals supplied with your amplifier for details Power amplifier 1 SB Surround Back FH Front High FW Front Wide Note Specify None for any channel that you don t want to output page 64 When connecting to the SB FH FW EXT AMP jacks you must set
163. en a button is reset its preprogrammed code is restored Note The learning command is also reset Resetting the Remote Controller You can reset the remote controller to its default settings 1 While holding down RECEIVER press and hold down HOME until RECEIVER lights about 3 seconds 2 Within 30 seconds press RECEIVER again RECEIVER flashes twice indicating that the remote controller has been reset En92 V Controlling Other Components Controlling Other Components By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that s been programmed with the remote control code for your component you can control your component as described below For details on entering a remote control code for other components see Entering Remote Control Codes gt page 91 Controlling a TV TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code for controlling a TV that supports the RIFILD 1 limited to some models The TV must be able to receive remote control commands via fRIFLD and be connected to the AV receiver via HDMI If controlling your TV via fRIFLD doesn t work very well program your TV s remote control code into TV and use the TV remote mode to control your TV Use the following remote control codes gt 11807 13100 13500 TV with RIHD Controlling Apple TV By programming the supplied remote controller with the appropriate remote control code you can use it to operate your Apple TV Use the following remote control
164. en set to standby 1 8 1 Use A F to select the input source that you want to set and then press ENTER The following menu appears 5 1 Listening Mode Preset BD DVD Analog PCM Last Valid lt gt Mono Multiplex Source Last Valid 2ch Source Last Valid Dolby D Dolby D Plus TrueHD Last Valid DTS DTS ES DTS HD Last Valid Other Multich Source Last Valid Default listening mode for analog and PCM sources O To be continued 2 Use A V to select the signal format that you want to set and then use lt gt to select a listening mode Only listening modes that can be used with each input signal format can be selected pages 42 to 49 The Last Valid option means that the listening mode selected last will be used The Straight Decode option means that straight decoding listening mode Dolby Digital DTS etc is selected Note For the TUNER input selector only Analog will be available Forthe NET or USB input selector only Digital will be available E Analog PCM Digital With this setting you can specify the listening mode used when an analog CD TV LD VHS MD turntable radio cassette cable satellite etc or PCM digital CD DVD etc audio signal is played Note For the GAME input selector only PCM is available B Mono Multiplex Source With this setting you can specify the listening mode used when a mono digital audio signal is played DVD etc B
165. ency reduces Add to My Favorites Adds a station to My Favorites list B Using scrobbling control Use A F to select Enable and then press ENTER Internet radio services provided by a third party may be terminated with or without notice Internet radio services may not be available in some areas Using Slacker Personal Radio 1 If you do not have an account create one on the Slacker website www slacker com with your computer If you already have a Slacker account select Sign in to your account and then press ENTER The keyboard screen appears You can enter information from the remote control or the keys on the main unit If there are no mistakes in the information you have entered use A lt gt to select OK then press ENTER An account information confirmation screen appears If you do not have an account select Access without Sign In and press ENTER to use a restricted version of the service Note that use will be restricted Tip If you want to use multiple user accounts see Using Multiple Accounts gt page 1 Login can be made from the Users screen Use A V to select a menu item and then press ENTER To sign out use A Y to select Sign out from this screen and then press ENTER Use A Y to select a station and then press ENTER or to start playback from the station The playback screen appears 6 You can control the tracks with the buttons on the re
166. erved Using Last fm Internet Radio Last fm is a music service that learns what you love Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever If you have a free Last fm account it will keep track of all the songs you ve just played When you visit the Last fm website you can see personal charts of the music you ve enjoyed share them with friends and see what they like too With thousands of biographies reviews and an endless choice of personalised ad free radio stations Last fm is a great way to discover music Pick up your free Last fm account today at www last fm join Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad free Last fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without a computer Recommended Radio Discover smart personalised recommendations that adapt as your tastes change Artist Radio Pick any artist and we ll play you a whole station of music inspired by your choice My Library Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music you ve heard since you joined Last fm Tag Radio Polish funk Death pop Think of a style and we ll entertain you with it for hours Start your free trial straight away when you create your account and see for yourself what it s like to have the world s music at your fingertips Latest prices and full information are available at www last fm subscribe 1 Use A Y to select Sign in to your account and then press ENTER If you have the existing Last fm account you can sign in to your accou
167. es A ade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos E Uso del control de scrobbling Utilice A V para seleccionar Enable y luego pulse ENTER Los servicios de radio por Internet suministrados por terceros pueden cancelarse con o sin aviso previo Es posible que los servicios de radio por Internet no est n disponibles en algunas zonas Uso de Slacker Personal Radio 1 Si no tiene una cuenta cree una en el sitio web de Slacker www slacker com con su ordenador Si ya tiene una cuenta de Slacker seleccione Sign in to your account y pulse ENTER Aparecer la pantalla de teclado Puede introducir informaci n desde el mando a distancia o desde el teclado de la unidad principal Si no hay errores en la informaci n que ha introducido utilice Y 4 para seleccionar OK y luego pulse ENTER Aparecer una pantalla de confirmaci n de la informaci n de la cuenta Si no tiene una cuenta seleccione Access without Sign In y pulse ENTER para utilizar una versi n restringida del servicio Tenga en cuenta que el uso estar restringido Consejo Si desea utilizar m ltiples cuentas de usuario consulte Uso de m ltiples cuentas gt p gina 1 Se puede iniciar sesi n desde la pantalla Users Utilice A V para seleccionar un men y luego pulse ENTER Para salir utilice A V para seleccionar Sign out en esta pantalla y luego pulse ENTER Utilice A V para seleccionar una emisora
168. es Medium Compression Mode gt Heavy Activates Heavy Compression Mode This setting affects volume the most It quiets the loud parts such as explosions and boosts the quiet parts so they can be heard Note If you want to use Audyssey Dynamic EQ or Audyssey Dynamic Volume with THX listening modes set the Loudness Plus setting to Off and set Preserve THX Settings to No page 67 f you make Dynamic Volume active Dynamic EQ is set to On The Dynamic Vol indicator will light When Dynamic EQ is set to Off Dynamic Volume is automatically switched to Off About Audyssey Dynamic EQ Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency response and surround levels moment by moment at any user selected volume setting The result is bass response tonal balance and surround impression that remain constant despite changes in volume Dynamic EQ combines information from incoming source levels with actual output sound levels in the room a prerequisite for delivering a loudness correction solution About Audyssey Dynamic Volume Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs commercials and between the soft and loud passages of movies Dynamic Volume looks at the preferred volume se
169. es the language used for the on screen menus Bi Screen Saver gt 3min 5min 10min gt Off With this setting you can set the time until the screen saver activates itself Once active the screen saver will go off and the screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is operated in any way Hardware Setup LLC Hardware Setup Tuner AM FM Frequency Step North American models gt 10kHz 200kHz gt 9kHz 50kHz Select the frequency step according to your area E AM Frequency Step European models gt 10kHz gt 9kHz Select the frequency step according to your area For AM FM tuning to work properly you must specify the AM FM frequency step used in your area Note When this setting is changed all radio presets will be deleted HDMI B HDMI Control RIHD gt Off gt On Turn this setting on to allow RIHD compatible components connected via HDMI to be controlled by the AV receiver gt page 111 Note When the setting is set to On and the menu is closed the names of connected f RIFLD compatible components and RIHD On are displayed on the AV receiver Search gt name gt RIHD On When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the component it is displayed as Player or Recorder etc shows up A En 79 Y Advanced Operations and indicates the number of components when two or more are received When an RIFUD
170. front high speakers There are three settings Low Mid and High and the front high speakers are accentuated in that order While Mid is the default listening setting the listener may adjust the Height Gain Control to their personal preference Note If the Front High setting is set to None gt page 64 this setting cannot be selected If the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes and Zone 2 is turned on this setting cannot be selected A En 69 Y Advanced Operations E Dolby EX gt Auto If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening mode is used gt Manual You can select any available listening mode This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded signals are handled This setting is unavailable if no surround back speakers are connected This setting is effective with Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD only Note If the Surround Back setting is set to None gt page 64 this setting cannot be selected If the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes and Zone 2 is turned on this setting cannot be selected If the Front High or Front Wide setting is enabled page 64 this setting is fixed to Manual E TrueHD Loudness Management gt Off On This setting specifies whether or not to apply the Late Night processing on a Dolby TrueHD source Note When this setting is set to Off
171. g a different input source If playback is not paused the Mak iPod iPhone is actually playing i i i i E Can t control other components e sure your iPod iPhone is actually playing Direct Change function may select your iPod iPhone Make sure your iPod iPhone is properly inserted in as the input source by mistake during the transition If it s an Onkyo component make sure that the RI 22 the Dock between tracks cable and analog audio cable are connected properly Make sure the AV receiver is turned on the correct Connecting only an RI cable won t be enough input source is selected and the volume is turned up E iPod iPhone doesn t work properly Make sure you ve selected the correct remote 12 92 Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way Try reconnecting your iPod iPhone Try resetting your iPod iPhone If you ve connected an cassette tape deck to the 51 TV CD IN jack or an RI Dock to the TV CD IN or GAME 1 IN jacks for the remote controller to work properly you must set the input display Make sure that your iPod iPhone model s TV OUT appropriately setting is set to On Bi There s no video En 100 Y 4 Bi There s no sound Only components connected to analog or HDMI 2ch PCM inputs can be played in Zone 2 Only components connected to analog inputs canbe played in Zone 3 Bi The Zone 2 3 speakers produce no sound See Multi Zone for the conditions in whic
172. g input source and set the Game Mode setting to On The delay will decrease but in return the picture quality will become poor B Film Video Film Mode detection is not applied and the input signal is handled as a video source gt Auto Detects whether the input signal is a video or a movie If it is a movie the appropriate conversion is applied The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source automatically converting it to the appropriate progressive signal and reproducing the natural quality of the original picture B Edge Enhancement 4 6 gt Off gt Low gt Mid gt High With this setting you can make the picture appear sharper B Noise Reduction 6 gt Off gt Low gt Mid gt High With this setting you can reduce noise appearing on the screen Select the desired level A En75 V Advanced Operations B Mosquito NR 4 67 gt Off gt Low gt Mid gt High With Mosquito Noise Reduction you can remove the shimmering or haziness that sometimes appears around objects in the picture Mosquito noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG content E Random NR 67 gt Orr gt Low gt Mid gt High With Random Noise Reduction you can remove indiscriminate picture noise such as film grain B Block 6 7 gt Off gt Low gt Mid gt High With Block Noise Reduction you can remove the block distortion that sometimes appears in the pict
173. g two methods update via network or update via USB storage Choose the one that best suits your environment Before proceeding with the update please read the corresponding explanations carefully E Update via network You need a wired Internet connection to update the firmware Bi Update via USB storage gt page 105 Please prepare a USB storage device such as a USB flash memory stick You need at least 32 MB of available space to update the firmware Note Check the network connection before updating Do not touch any cable or device connected to the AV receiver during the update process Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it is being updated Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while it is being updated The storage media in the USB card reader may not work If the USB device is partitioned each section will be treated as an independent device If the USB device contains a lot of data the AV receiver may take a while to read it Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices which includes the ability to power them Onkyo takes no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or damage of data resulting from the use of a USB device with the AV receiver Onkyo recommends that you back up your important music files beforehand If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port Onkyo recommends that you use its AC adapter to power it USB hubs and USB devices with hub func
174. h 83 Powered Zone 2 3 cannot be used To use the Zone 2 speakers you must set the 63 Powered Zone 2 setting to Yes To use the Zone 3 speakers you must set the 63 Powered Zone 3 setting to Yes Music Server and Internet Radio E Can t access the server or Internet radio Check the network connection between the AV 114 receiver and your router or switch Make sure that your modem and router are properly connected and make sure they are both turned on Make sure the server is up and running and 115 compatible with the AV receiver Check the Network settings 81 E Playback stops while listening to music files on the server Make sure your server is compatible with the AV 115 receiver If you download or copy large files on your computer playback may be interrupted Try closing any unused programs use a more powerful computer or use a dedicated server Appendix If the server is serving large music files to several networked devices simultaneously the network may become overloaded and playback may be interrupted Reduce the number of playback devices on the network upgrade your network or use a switch instead of a hub Bi Can t connect to the AV receiver from a Web browser If you re using DHCP your router may not always 81 allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver so if you find that you can t connect to a server or Internet radio station recheck the AV receiver s IP
175. hapter To start the search press the enter button The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of the type you specified at which point it stops briefly before continuing with the search When a station you want to listen to is found press the enter button If no stations are found the message Not Found appears E Listening to Traffic News TP You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news 1 Press RT PTY TP three times If the current radio station is broadcasting TP Traffic Program TP will appear on the AV receiver s display If TP without square brackets appears this means that the station is not broadcasting TP To locate a station that is broadcasting TP press the enter button The AV receiver searches until it finds a station that s broadcasting TP If no stations are found the message Not Found appears En37 Y Turning On amp Basic Operations RDS program types PTY Type Display None None News reports News Current affairs Affairs Information Info Sport Sport Education Educate Drama Drama Culture Culture Science and technology Science Varied Varied Pop music PopM Rock music Rock M Middle of the road music Easy M Light classics Light M Serious classics Classics Other music Other M Weather Weather Finance Finance Children s programmes Children Social affa
176. he Icon Layout on the Network Service Screen You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output HDMI OUT MAIN to make the following on screen setting The layout of icons can be customized by switching their positions on the network service screen 1 Press NET The network service screen appears and the NET indicator lights If it flashes verify that the Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver Tip The same operation can be done by selecting Network Service in the Home menu N Press MODE D blue on the remote controller Use A V 4 to select an icon to move and then press ENTER Use Y 4 to select another icon as the destination and then press ENTER The icons switch positions and the message Completed appears Q Playing Music Files on a Server DLNA You need to connect the AV receiver to your home network gt page 114 The on screen information appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI outputs This section explains how to play music files on a computer or media server through the AV receiver Server Playback 1 Start your computer or media server 2 Press NET The network service screen appears The NET indicator lights If it flashes confirm the network connection Tip The same operation can be done by selecting Network Service in the Home menu Use 4 gt to select DLNA and press ENTER Q 4 Use A V to select a server and then p
177. he on screen information appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI outputs If your TV is connected to other video outputs use the AV receiver s display when changing settings This section describes the procedure for using the remote controller unless otherwise specified Playing the Connected Component Bi Operating with the remote controller RECEIVER SOURCE zone mn INPUT SELECTOR RECEIVER VOL A Y ENTER g Listening mode buttons Press RECEIVER followed by an INPUT SELECTOR button A Q Start playback on the source component See also Playing an iPod iPhone via USB gt page 28 Playing a USB Device gt page 29 Listening to vTuner Internet Radio page 29 Registering Other Internet Radio gt page 30 Playing Music Files on a Server DLNA gt page 31 Remote Playback gt page 32 Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder 2 page 33 Listening to AM FM Radio page 34 Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources 2 page 38 e iPod iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock gt page 88 Controlling Other Components page 90 To adjust the volume use VOL A Y Select a listening mode and enjoy See also Using the Listening Modes page 42 Sound Program Edit page 71 En26 Y Turning On amp Basic Operations E Operating on the AV receiver Input selector buttons MASTER VOLUME
178. he support for Extended Mode Video is not guaranteed Standard Mode Control The content information is not displayed but can be operated using the iPod iPhone or the remote controller Playing a USB Device The on screen information appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI outputs This section explains how to play music files from a USB device e g USB flash drives and MP3 players See also Network USB Features page 114 1 Press USB repeatedly to select the USB Front or USB Rear input 2 Plug your USB device into the AV receiver s USB port The USB indicator lights It will flash if the AV receiver cannot read the USB device 3 Press ENTER A list of the device s contents appears To open a folder use A F to select it and then press ENTER 4 Use A Y to select a music file and press ENTER or gt to start playback Note While the message Connecting appears on the AV receiver s display do not disconnect the USB cable supplied with your iPod iPhone or the USB device from the USB port En29 Y Turning On amp Basic Operations Listening to vTuner Internet Radio You need to connect the AV receiver to your home network gt page 114 The on screen information appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI outputs The vTuner Internet Radio Service is a portal site featuring radio stations from all over the world You can search for stations by categories such as genre or
179. hile setting the delay when the video source is output to HDMI OUT MAIN To return to the previous screen press RETURN The range of values you can adjust will depend on whether your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync and if the Lip Sync setting is set to On or not gt page 80 Note A V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is used with an analog input source This setting cannot be used with the NET input selector The USB input selector can be used only when iPod iPhone is connected and Standard Mode or Extended Mode Video is selected Ae Name Edit You can enter a custom name for each individual input selector and radio preset for easy identification When entered the custom name will appear on the display The custom name is edited using the keyboard screen E Name Use A lt gt to select a character and then press ENTER Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters 2 To store a name when you re done be sure to select OK by using A V 4 and then press ENTER Name input area 4 4 Name Edit BD DVD Name gt o co oo 2 Space jack Space OK o Eus 1000 Losa a All Erase Space Enters a space character Shift Toggles between lower and upper case characters Left gt Right Moves the cursor left or right in the Name input area Back Space Moves the cursor backward and deletes one character OK
180. hine or inverter type fluorescent lights B Can t ds t th t Make sure you ve selected the right remote mode 89 an t learn commands from another remote Relocate if necessary troll When you use the AV receiver s remote controller If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet SONORE point it toward your AV receiver with colored glass doors the remote controller may When learning commands make sure that the 95 If you still can t control your iPod iPhone start not work reliably when the doors are closed transmitting ends of both remote controllers are playback by pressing your iPod iPhone model s Play Make sure you ve selected the correct remote 12 92 pointing at each other button Remote operation should then be possible controller mode Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that Try resetting your iPod iPhone When using the remote controller to control other cannot be used for learning Some commands Depending on your iPod iPhone some buttons may manufacturers AV components some buttons may cannot be learned especially those that contain not work as expected not work as expected several instructions Make sure you ve entered the correct remote control 91 Bi The AV receiver unexpectedly selects my RI Dock for iPod iPhone iPod iPhone as the input source Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver 82 and remote controller E There s no sound Always pause iPod iPhone playback before selectin
181. ield If you are using Internet Explorer you can also enter the URL by selecting Open on the File menu Q Information on the AV receiver is then shown on your Internet browser Web Setup 4 Click on the My Favorites tab and enter the Internet radio station s name and URL En30 Y Turning On amp Basic Operations 5 Click Save to save the Internet radio station The Internet radio station is then added to My Favorites To play the registered station press NET and then select My Favorites on the network service screen A list of registered Internet radio stations appears Select the one that you saved and press ENTER Tip If you want to add a new station directly from My Favorites select an empty slot in the list and press MENU Then select Create New Station and press ENTER Pressing ENTER again will display the keyboard screen Use that keyboard to enter the station s name and URL respectively and then press ENTER f you want to delete a station saved in My Favorites press MENU with the station selected or while the station is playing Then use A Y to select Delete from My Favorites and press ENTER You can also delete stations from the Web Setup If you want to rename a station select the desired station and press MENU Then use A F to select Rename this station and press ENTER You can save up to 40 Internet radio stations Changing t
182. iers 70157 Harman Kardon 40029 Magnavox 70157 Sony 70490 70000 Inkel 40070 CD Marantz 70626 70029 70157 Sylvania 70157 JVC 40244 Advantage 70032 Matsui 70157 TAG McLaren 70157 Kenwood 40070 AH 70157 MCS 70029 Tandy 70032 Magnavox 40029 Aiwa 70157 Memorex 70032 Technics 70029 70303 Marantz 40029 Arcam 70157 Meridian 70157 Thorens 70157 Myryad 40029 Atoll Electronique 70157 Micromega 70157 Thule Audio 70157 Onkyo 42157 Audio Research 70157 Miro 70000 Traxdata 70626 Optimus 40027 Audiolab 70157 Mission 70157 Universum 70157 Philips 40029 Audiomeca 70157 Myryad 70157 Victor 70072 Pioneer 40027 Audioton 70157 NAD 70000 70721 Wards 70000 70032 70157 Polk Audio 40029 AVI 70157 Naim 70157 Yamaha 70490 70032 70036 Radiola 40029 Balanced Audio 70157 NSM 70157 Zonda 70157 RCA 40027 Technology Onkyo 71817 Revox 40029 1015 Optimus 70000 70032 CD R Sansui 40029 California Audio Labs 70029 70303 Panasonic 70029 70303 Denon 70626 70766 Sony 40243 Cambridge 70157 Philips 70626 70157 JVC 70072 Thorens 40029 Cambridge Audio 70157 Pioneer 70032 70101 Kenwood 70626 Victor 40244 Carver 70157 Polk Audio 70157 Marantz 70626 Wards 40027 40029 CCE 70157 Primare 70157 Onkyo 71323 Yamaha 40097 Cyr s 057 Proton 70157 Philips 70626 Denon 70626 70766 QED 70157 Sony 70000 Accessory DKK 70000 nid 70157 1 81115 DMX Electronics 70157 Quasar 70029 MD Jamo 82228 Dynaco 70157 Radiola 70157 Onkyo 70868 Logitech 82182 Genexxa 70000 70032 RCA 70032 So
183. iicom 11709 Innova 10037 Tp A 1809 Hankook 10178 Insignia 10171 11423 11564 Kosmos 10037 Hanseatic 10556 10037 10625 12049 Kunlun 10208 es 10803 11248 11666 10714 10634 10499 Integra 11807 13100 13500 L amp S Electronic 10714 Funar 10171 10714 10668 12001 Interbuy 10037 Lavic 11363 11037 11394 11666 Hantarex 10037 11817 13817 Interfunk 10037 10512 Lavis 11037 Hantor 10037 G Hanz 11363 Internal 10556 Lecson 10037 Harwood 10037 E Gaba 11037 10037 Intervision 10037 Lenco 10037 11037 i auppauge Irradio 10037 Leyco 10037 Galaxi 10037 HB 11324 REEE 10037 IRT 10698 LG 10178 10556 10037 G 003 HCM 10037 Gateway 11755 Isukai 10037 10714 10715 10698 E DERI IDEE Highline 10037 ITS 10037 11423 11768 11840 gt gt inari 12182 12358 12424 10560 Mr n 10208 ITT 10208 12834 GEC 10037 a ITT Nokia 10208 Liesenkoetter 10037 A 12 y Ae Remote Control Codes Television Television Television Television Lifetec 10037 10714 10668 Medion 10556 10037 10714 Naiko 10037 Onix 10698 11037 12001 iu s E Nakimura 10037 Onkyo 11807 13100 13500 Linsar 11585 To
184. ilice A V para seleccionar I have a Pandora Account o I m new to Pandora y luego pulse ENTER Si no conoce Pandora seleccione I m new to Pandora Ver un c digo de activaci n en la pantalla del televisor Tome nota de este c digo Vaya a un ordenador conectado a Internet y dirija el navegador a www pandora com onkyo Introduzca su c digo de activaci n y siga las instrucciones para crear su cuenta de Pandora y sus emisoras de radio por Internet personalizadas de Pandora Puede crear sus propias emisoras introduciendo sus canciones y artistas favoritos cuando aparezca la solicitud correspondiente Una vez creada su cuenta y sus emisoras puede regresar al receptor Onkyo y pulsar Enter para empezar a escuchar su radio por Internet personalizada de Pandora Si ya dispone de una cuenta de Pandora puede a adirla al receptor Onkyo seleccionando I have a Pandora Account e iniciando la sesi n con su direcci n de correo electr nico y contrase a Consejo Sidesea utilizar m ltiples cuentas de usuario consulte Uso de m ltiples cuentas gt p gina 1 Se puede iniciar sesi n desde la pantalla Users 2 Utilice A Y para seleccionar la emisora en la lista de emisoras y luego pulse ENTER Se inicia la reproducci n y aparece la pantalla de reproducci n Create a New Station Introduzca el nombre de una canci n artista o g nero Pandora crear una emisora de radio exclusiva para usted basada e
185. ils the HDMI output DTS HD Master 32152172 Direct In this mode audio from the input source is Audio 92 output without surround sound processing The speaker configuration presence of DTS HD MSTR 3 2 5 2 7 2 speakers and speaker distance settings are 9 2 enabled but much of the processing set via DTS Express 3 2115 21 7 2 the audio setup is disabled See On screen 82 Setup for more details gt page 54 DTS Express Stereo Sound is output from the front left and right 2 2 3 2 5 2 DTS 96 24 5 This mode is for use with DTS 96 24 3 2 b 2 7 2 speakers and subwoofer 7 2 9 2 sources This is high resolution DTS with a 9 2 NEC DCE 96 kHz sampling rate and 24 bit resolution Mono Use this mode when watching an old movie providing superior fidelity Use it with with a mono soundtrack or use it with the DVDs that bear the DTS 96 24 logo ono oe recorded DTS ES Discrete 6 This mode is for use with DTS ES Discrete 099 Sa rignt cnanneis Ot some soundtracks which use a discrete surround 9 2 SB FH can also be used with DVDs or other sources ES Discrete back ch 1 for true 6 1 7 1 ch 1 containing multiplexed audio such as Mi qe dero UA ONU NOE MGR EN 92 SB FW ad DVD P playback The seven totally separate audio channels provide better spatial imaging an araoke s h Is provide b patial imaging and Multichannel This mode is for use with PCM multichannel 1 13 215 272 360 degree sou
186. imizer gt Off On See Music Optimizer page 57 5 B Equalizer gt Off gt Manual The manual setting in Equalizer Settings page 66 is applied B Audyssey gt Off Movie Music See Audyssey page 56 B Dynamic EQ gt Off On See Dynamic EQ page 56 B Dynamic Volume gt Off Light Medium Heavy See Dynamic Volume gt page 56 Dolby Volume gt Off On See Dolby Volume gt page 56 Note Listening Mode is only available when the input signal matches the setting of Sound Program You cannot select the Subwoofer setting if you set it to No in Speaker Configuration Music Optimizer is only available when Stereo Source 1 Stereo Source 2 or Stereo Source 3 is selected When Audyssey Quick Start has been used for measurement the Audyssey setting cannot be selected 1 This setting cannot be used when the Listening Mode setting is set to Pure Audio or Direct 2 To enable this setting you must first perform the Room Correction and Speaker Setup Source Setup CI Main Menu Source Setup Items can be set individually for each input selector Preparation Press the input selector buttons to select an input source Audyssey The tone for each speaker is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup To enable the following settings you must fir
187. ing you can select the combination of settings that you registered in Sound Program Edit gt page 71 Note If the input selector is changed the Sound Program setting is switched back to Off En 55 V Advanced Operations Tone Control B Bass 10dB to 0dB to 10dB in 2 dB steps You can boost or cut low frequency sounds output E Treble gt 10dB to 0dB to 10dB in 2 dB steps You can boost or cut high frequency sounds output You can adjust the bass for the front front wide front high center surround surround back and subwoofer speakers and treble for the front front wide front high center surround and surround back speakers except when the Direct Pure Audio or THX listening mode is selected Operating on the AV receiver Press TONE repeatedly to select either Bass or Treble for each speaker or subwoofer 2 Use and to adjust Note Speakers that are set to No or None in Speaker Configuration page 64 cannot be adjusted When Sound Program is enabled Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer 2 cannot be used if the Subwoofer setting is set to No in Sound Program Edit page 71 Speaker Levels E Subwoofer 1 15 0dB to 0 0dB to 12 0dB in 0 5 dB steps E Subwoofer 2 1 gt 15 0dB to 0 0dB to 12 0dB in 0 5 dB steps E Center gt 12 0dB to 0 0dB to 12 0dB in 0 5 dB steps You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening
188. io 32808 Goodmans 30713 31152 Magnavox 30503 30539 30646 31571 32442 32860 Centrum 30675 30713 GPX 30741 30675 30713 31354 Polk Audio 30539 Changhong 30627 Grandin 30713 Manhattan 30713 Presidian 30675 Cinetec 30713 Grundig 30539 30713 Marantz 30539 32414 32432 ProAudio 31394 Clatronic 30675 H amp B 30713 33444 Proscan 30522 Clayton 30713 Haaz 31152 Mark 30713 Proson 30713 Crown 30713 Hanseatic 30741 Matsui 30713 Pye 30539 30646 16 y Remote Control Codes DVD DVD DVD Blu ray Disc Radionette 30741 Sylvania 30630 30675 Yamaha 30490 30539 30646 Sony 31516 32180 Radiotone 30713 Symphonic 30675 30817 31354 32298 Sylvania 30675 ymp y RCA 30522 30571 32213 Tamashi 31394 22227 Toshiba 32551 32705 33157 32587 Tandberg 30713 zum te Vizio 32563 REC 30490 Targa 30741 Yamaha 32298 32299 Red 32213 TU TT Blu ray Disc ecnibo Pi Redstar 31394 TCL 32587 Ambiance a DVD R Roadstar 30713 TCM 30741 00 an Accurian 30675 Rotel 30623 Teac 30571 30741 30675 Cambridge Audio 22203 Aristona 30646 Salora 30741 31394 Deron 32255 221R Denon 30490 Samsung 30490 30573 30199 Technica 30
189. ir le code de t l commande cinq chiffres l aide des boutons num rot s Le bouton REMOTE MODE Ie t moin Remote clignote deux fois Si le code de t l commande n a pas t saisi correctement le bouton REMOTE MODE l indicateur Remote ne clignote qu une seule fois Remarques L l ment clignotant de la t l commande diff rera selon le mod le de votre ampli tuner AV La t l commande est pr configur e avec des pr r glages de t l commande de diff rents appareils En entrant un code de la liste des codes de t l commandes vous pouvez activer le pr r glage appropri pour cet appreil e Quand il y a de multiples codes li s un fabricant essayez les et entrez les un par un jusqu ce que cela corresponde votre appareil Selon le mod le et l ann e de votre appareil la compatibilit n est pas garantie Avec certains mod les la t l commande peut ne pas fonctionner ou sa compatibilit peut tre limit e une partie de la fonctionnalit de l appareil En outre il n est pas possible d ajouter de nouveaux codes aux pr r glages de t l commande existants Bien que les codes de t l commande fournis soient corrects au moment de l impression de la liste ils sont susceptibles d tre modifi s par le fabricant Remote Control Codes C digos de control remoto 1 Manteniendo pulsado el bot n REMOTE MODE para el cual desea introducir un c digo pulse y mantenga presionado el bot
190. irs Social Religion Religion Phone in Phone In Travel Travel Leisure Leisure Jazz music Jazz Country music Country National music Nation M Oldies music Oldies Folk music Folk M Documentary Document Alarm test TEST Alarm Alarm Turning On amp Basic Operations Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources You can listen to the audio of one input source while watching the video of another This function takes advantage of the fact that when an audio only input source TV CD PHONO is selected the video input source remains unchanged The following procedure shows how to listen to a CD player s audio source connected to TV CD IN while watching a Blu ray Disc DVD player s video source connected to BD DVD 1 Press BD DVD 2 Press TV CD The audio output changes to the CD source but the video of previously selected BD DVD is retained 3 Start playback on your Blu Ray Disc DVD and CD players You can now enjoy watching your Blu ray Disc DVD with the sound of your CD player En38 V ley Q Using Basic Functions Using the Automatic Speaker Setup With the supplied calibrated microphone Audyssey MultEQ XT32 automatically determines the number of speakers connected their size for purposes of bass management optimum crossover frequencies to the subwoofer if present and distances from the primary listening position Audyssey MultEQ XT32 then removes the distortion caused by room acoustics by capturing r
191. is connected to the AV receiver with a digital audio connection coaxial optical or HDMI The listening modes you can select depends on the format of the input signal To check the format see Displaying Source Information page 51 While a pair of headphones is connected you can select the following listening modes Pure Audio Mono Direct and Stereo About Listening Modes The AV receiver s listening modes can transform your listening room into a movie theater or concert hall with high fidelity and stunning surround sound E Explanatory Notes Front speakers Center speaker Surround speakers Subwoofer s Surround back speakers O Front high speakers Front wide speakers SP speaker layout MENU MENU SPIGUIDE PREV CH PLAYLIST PLAYLIST RETURN Input Source The following audio formats are supported by the listening modes Turning On amp Basic Operations Speaker Layout The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each channel See Speaker Configuration for the speaker setup gt page 64 2 2 This is mono monophonic sound TERE This is stereo stereophonic sound Two independent audio signal channels are reproduced through two speakers This is 5 1 channel surround sound This surround system has five main channels of sound and a sixth subwoofer channel called the point one cha
192. itable for acoustic instruments vocals and jazz this mode emphasizes the front stereo image giving the impression of being right in front of the stage Studio Mix Studio Mix Suitable for rock or pop music listening to music in this mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acoustic image like being at a club or rock concert TV Logic This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV EE shows produced TV studio surround ee effects to the entire sound and clarity to voices Game RPG In this mode the sound has a dramatic feel with a similar atmosphere to Orchestra Game RPG mode Game Action In this mode sound localization is distinct Game Action with emphasis on bass Game Rock Game Hock In this mode sound pressure is emphasized to heighten live feel Game Sports Game Sports In this mode reverberation is increased and sound localization decreased slightly Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Speaker Source Layout Layout All Ch Stereo Ideal for background music this mode fills 3 2 5 2 7 2 5 2 ANNEES the entire listening area with stereo sound 9 2 r from the front surround and surround back speakers Full Mono In this mode all speakers output the same sound in mono so the sound you hear is the Full Mono WERE same regardless of where you are within the listening room T D Theater With this mode you can enjoy a virtual Dimensi
193. iver is connected Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main Listening Position D and connect it to the SETUP MIC jack SETUP MIC jack SETUP MIC Speaker setup microphone The speaker setting menu appears Note The on screen menus appear only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN If your TV is connected to other video outputs use the AV receiver s display when changing settings When you ve finished making the settings press ENTER MultEQ XT32 Auto Setup E Speakers Type Front Normal lt gt Powered Zone 2 No Powered Zone 3 No Preout to External Amplifier No Subwoofer 2ch Perform the Speaker Setup according to your speaker configuration Speakers Type Front page 63 Powered Zone 2 page 63 Powered Zone 3 gt page 63 Preout to External Amplifier gt page 64 Subwoofer page 64 If you use a powered subwoofer s go to step 4 If not go to step 5 If Speakers Type Front is set to Digital Crossover a confirmation screen appears Select Next 2 7 Digital Processing Crossover Network to display the screen for Digital Processing Crossover Network page 67 Continue with the settings Adjust the subwoofer volume level to 75 dB and then press ENTER Test tones are played through the subwoofer Use the volume control on the subwoofer When the Subwoofer setting is set to Ich only the left hand subwoofer SW1 wil
194. kers cannot be used If the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to No the Powered Zone 3 setting cannot be selected Preout to External Amplifier is not available in either of the following cases The Speakers Type Front setting is set to Bi Amp or Digital Crossover The Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes Speaker Configuration This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup page 39 With these settings you can specify which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency for each speaker Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low frequency bass sounds adequately for example speakers with a good sized woofer For smaller speakers specify a crossover frequency Sounds below the crossover frequency will be output by the subwoofer instead of the speaker Refer to your speaker s manuals to determine the optimum crossover frequencies If you set up your speakers using Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup please make sure manually that any THX speakers are set to 80Hz THX crossover Subwoofer gt Ich Audio signal is outputted from SW1 jack only gt 2ch Audio signal is outputted from SW1 and SW2 jacks gt No B Front Full Band gt 40Hz 45Hz 50Hz 55Hz 60 Hz 70Hz 80Hz THX 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz 130Hz 150Hz 200Hz Note f the Subwoofer setting is set to N
195. l la liste My Favorites Fra V Utilisation d une webradio Siriusxm INTERNET RADIO Les abonnements SiriusXM Internet Radio sont vendus s par ment et sont subordonn s par les conditions Sirius voir www sirius com Assurez vous de lire cet accord avant d acqu rir votre abonnement Sirius XM et tous les logos et marques aff rents sont des marques d pos es de Sirius XM Radio Inc et de ses filiales Tous droits r serv s Utilisation de la webradio Last fm Last fm un service de musique qui apprend ce que vous aimez Votre nouvel ampli tuner AV Onkyo est tr s intelligent Si vous avez un compte Last fm gratuit il garde une trace de toutes les chansons que vous avez juste jou es Quand vous vous rendez sur le site Web de Last fm vous pouvez voir les graphiques personnels de la musique que vous avez appr ci e les partagez avec vos amis et galement voir ce qu ils aiment Avec des milliers de biographies de revues et un choix infini de stations de radio personnalis es et sans pub Last fm est excellent moyen de d couvrir de la musique Cr ez aujourd hui votre compte Last fm gratuit sur www last fm join Inscrivez vous et vous pourrez appr cier le meilleur de la radio sans pub Last fm sur votre ampli tuner AV Onkyo sans ordinateur Recommended Radio D couvrez les recommandations personnalis es fut es qui changent en m me temps que vos go ts Artist Radio S lectionnez n importe quel arti
196. l be measured When the Subwoofer setting is set to Ich with two subwoofers connected the right hand subwoofer SW2 will not be measured and no sound will be output An error will occur if you set Subwoofer to 2ch without connecting any subwoofers or with only one subwoofer connected Note f your subwoofer does not have a volume control disregard the displayed level and press ENTER to proceed to the next step f you set the subwoofer s volume control to its maximum and the level displayed is lower than 75 dB leave the subwoofer s volume control at its maximum and press ENTER to proceed to the next step f you use two subwoofers perform this step twice Use A V to select Audyssey Quick Start or Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration and then press ENTER A 40 Y Turning On amp Basic Operations 6 Press ENTER Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup starts Test tones are played through each speaker as Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup runs This process takes a few minutes Please refrain from talking during measurements and do not stand between speakers and the microphone Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone during Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup unless you want to cancel the setup If you select Audyssey Quick Start you will go to step 9 Place the speaker setup microphone at the next position
197. l logotipo de PANDORA logo y la imagen corporativa de Pandora son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de Pandora Media Inc Uso con permiso Uso de Rhapsody solo EE UU 1 Utilice A Y para seleccionar Sign in to your account y luego pulse ENTER Para utilizar Rhapsody necesitar una cuenta Si todav a no tiene una puede crear una nueva en www rhapsody com onkyo Si ya tiene una cuenta Rhapsody seleccione Sign in to your account y pulse ENTER Escriba su nombre de usuario normalmente el correo electr nico y contrasef a en la pantalla de teclado que aparece a continuaci n o en la configuraci n web E Utilizaci n de la pantalla de teclado 1 Utilice A W y ENTER para introducir su nombre de usuario y su contrase a 2 Seleccione OK 3 Pulse ENTER Aparecer la pantalla Confirm your entries 4 Pulse ENTER Consejo Sidesea utilizar m ltiples cuentas de usuario consulte Uso de m ltiples cuentas gt p gina 1 Se puede iniciar sesi n desde la pantalla Users 2 Utilice A Y para seleccionar el men y luego pulse ENTER Search Puede buscar m sica por artista lbum o canci n Music Guide Puede reproducir canciones por g neros artistas principales lbumes principales o canciones principales novedades selecci n del sitio Rhapsody Channels Escuche las emisoras de radio programadas por los principales redactores de Rhapsody Playlists Rep
198. l presente documento ma sono soggetti a variazioni da parte del produttore Remote Control Codes Fernbedienungscodes 1 Halten Sie die REMOTE MODE Taste gedruckt fur die Sie den Code eingeben mochten und drucken Sie ca 3 Sekunden lang die DISPLAY Taste Die REMOTE MODE Taste Remote Anzeige leuchtet Bei den Integra Produkten werden die Namen der Tasten grof geschrieben Zum Beispiel Remote Mode Fernbedienungsmodus Taste und Display Taste Hinweise Der Fernbedienungscode kann nicht RECEIVER und der Multi Zonen Taste zugeordnet werden Der Taste TV k nnen nur Fernbedienungscodes f r einen Fernseher zugeordnet werden Abgesehen von RECEIVER TV und der Multi Zone Taste k nnen die Fernbedienungscodes jeder Kategorie den REMOTE MODE Tasten zugewiesen werden Allerdings dienen diese Tasten auch als Quellenwahltasten W hlen Sie also nach M glichkeit eine REMOTE MODE Taste die dem Eingang zugeordnet ist an den Sie die betreffende Quelle angeschlossen haben Wenn Sie z B einen CD Player an den CD Eingang anschliefen sollten Sie TV CD wenn Sie den Fernbedienungscode eingeben Geben Sie mit den Zifferntasten innerhalb von 30 Sekunden den 5 stelligen Herstellercode ein Die REMOTE MODE Taste Remote Anzeige blinkt zwei Mal Wenn der Fernbedienungscode nicht ordnungsgem f eingegeben wurde blinkt die REMOTE MODE Taste Remote Anzeige einmal langsam Hinweise Das blinkende Element auf der Fe
199. lect Off THX 65 Y Advanced Operations Speaker Distance This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup 3 page 39 Here you can specify the distance from each speaker to the listening position so that the sound from each speaker arrives at the listener s ears as the sound designer intended B Unit gt feet Distances can be set in feet Range 0 2ft to 30 0ft in 0 2 foot steps gt meters Distances can be set in meters Range 0 06m to 9 00m in 0 06 meter steps The default setting varies from country to country E Left Front Wide Left Front High Left Center Front High Right Front Wide Right Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer 2 1 gt Specify the distance from each speaker to your listening position Note Speakers that you set to No or None in Speaker Configuration cannot be selected gt page 64 When the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes and Zone 2 is turned on the surround back and front high speakers cannot be used When the Powered Zone 3 setting is set to Yes and Zone 3 is turned on the surround speakers cannot be used 1 If the Subwoofer setting is set to Ich this setting cannot be selected gt page 64 5 Level Calibration This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
200. lling Other Components iPod iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock 88 Using the Onkyo Dock 88 Controlling Your iPod iPhone 89 Controlling Other Components 90 Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes Looking up for Remote Control Codes 90 Entering Remote Control Codes 91 Remapping Colored Buttons 91 Remote Control Codes for Onkyo Components Connected via RI 92 Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons 92 Resetting the Remote Controller 92 Controlling Other Components 92 Learning Commands 95 Using Normal Macros sisi oi 96 Appendix Troubleshooting minita sillin Firmware Update E Connection Tips and Video Signal Path Using an RIHD compatible TV Player OF BOCOIUBE iecore D Tac 111 About HDMI 1183 Network USB Features 114 License and Trademark Information s117 Specifica ONS normes 118 To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults turn it on and while holding down CBL SAT press OON STANDBY gt page 97 Features Amplifier 140 Watts Channel 8 ohms FTC 200 Watts Channel 6 ohms IEC WRAT Wide Range Amplifier Technology 5 Hz to 100 KHz bandwidth Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry H C P S High Current Po
201. lling the AV Receiver RECEIVER SOURCE To control the AV receiver press RECEIVER to select Receiver mode You can also use the remote controller to control Onkyo Blu ray Disc DVD player CD player and other components See Entering Remote Control Codes for more details gt page 91 For detailed information see the pages in parentheses D RECEIVER button 23 ACTIVITIES buttons 53 96 REMOTE MODE INPUT SELECTOR buttons 26 SP speaker layout button 52 A Y 4 and ENTER buttons 8 Q SETUP button 54 Listening Mode buttons 42 DIMMER button 51 DISPLAY button 51 MUTING button 52 VOL A Y button 26 RETURN button HOME button 50 SLEEP button 51 60000800 En12 V Safety Information and Introduction E Controlling the tuner To control the AV receiver s tuner press TUNER or RECEIVER You can select AM or FM by pressing TUNER repeatedly O A V buttons 34 D TUN button 34 DISPLAY button CH button 35 Number buttons 34 1 When you want to change the remote controller mode target component without changing the current input source press MODE and within about 8 seconds press REMOTE MODE Then using the same AV receiver s remote controller you can control the component corresponding to the button you pressed 2 These buttons can also be used when a REMOTE MODE other than Receiver mode is selected Connecting the AV Receiver Conne
202. location The AV receiver is preinstalled with this service 7 Press NET The network service screen appears and the NET indicator lights If it flashes verify that the Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver Tip The same operation can be done by selecting Network Service in the Home menu Use A lt to select vTuner Internet Radio and then press ENTER 3 Use A V to select a program and then press ENTER Playback starts Jd My Music 0 11 Great Artist My Favorite Tip You can find stations similar to the one being played During playback press MENU on the remote controller select Stations like this and press ENTER 5 B Adding vTuner Internet Radio Stations to Favorites There are two ways you can register specific Internet radio stations programs from the vTuner Internet Radio Adding to My Favorites The selected program will be added to My Favorites on the network service screen which appears when pressing NET on the remote controller 1 Press MENU with the station selected or while a station is playing 2 Use A V to select Add to My Favorites and press ENTER 3 Use A lt 4 gt to select OK and press ENTER Tip You can rename the stations saved in My Favorites Adding to vTuner Internet Radio s Favorites Select vTuner Internet Radio and press ENTER to display the Favorites folder that appears on the same scr
203. ly cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped Damage Requiring Service Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions A When the power supply cord or plug is damaged B If liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus C Ifthe apparatus has been exposed to rain or water PORTABLE CART WARNING A En2 V 16 17 18 b Safety Information and Introduction D If the apparatus does not operate normally by following the operating instructions Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the apparatus to its normal operation E Ifthe apparatus has been dropped or damaged in any way and F When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in performance this indicates a need for service Object and Liquid Entry Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids such as vases shall be placed on the
204. mehreren Logins umschalten k nnen Nach der Anmeldung der Nutzerkonten wird das Login vom Users Bildschirm aus vorgenommen 1 Dr cken Sie MENU w hrend der Bildschirm des Nutzers angezeigt wird Das folgende Men erscheint Add new user Remove this user Sie k nnen entweder ein neues Nutzerkonto abspeichern oder ein bestehendes l schen Verwendung von Last fm Internet Radio 2 Allgemeine Verfahren bei den Internetradio Men s Anmerkung Die verf gbaren Dienste sind l nderabh ngig verschieden 1 Dr cken Sie NET Es erscheint eine Liste der Netzwerkdienste und die NET Anzeige leuchtet Wenn sie blinkt berpr fen Sie ob das Ethernet Kabel fest im AV Receiver eingesteckt ist 2 Wahlen Sie den gew nschten Service aus und dr cken Sie ENTER Die oberste Seite des ausgew hlten Services erscheint Tipp Einige dieser Dienstleistungen lassen keine mehrfachen Nutzerkonten zu Sie k nnen bis zu 10 Nutzerkonten speichern Um zwischen den Konten umzuschalten m ssen Sie sich zuerst aus Ihrem aktuellen Konto ausloggen und sich dann wieder auf dem Users Bildschirm einloggen Dei Y Aes Verwendung von Last fm Internet Radio Last fm ist ein Musikdienst der sich Ihre Lieblingsmusik merkt Ihr neuer Onkyo AV Receiver ist uBerst clever Wenn Sie ein kostenloses Last fm Konto eingerichtet haben werden darin alle k rzlich abgespielten Titel gespeichert Wenn Sie die Last fm We
205. mote control Enabled buttons gt gt II W gt gt E Menu Items Rate Song as Favorite Stores information to server making it more likely that the song will be played again Ban Song Stores information to server making it less likely that the song will be played again Ban Artist Stores information to server making it less likely that the songs from this artist will be played again Mark Favorite Adds the currently playing station to your favorites Unmark Favorite Deletes the currently playing station from your favorites Add song to Library Adds the currently playing track to your library Delete song from Library Deletes the currently playing track from your library Add to My Favorites Adds a station or song to My Favorites list A Ene Y Using Internet Radio Using MP3tunes Listen to your music collection on your home stereo in complete digital fidelity without a personal computer plus safely backup all your songs Here s how Creating an Account on your Computer N QN From your computer open a web browser and go to www mp3tunes com signup Create an account Click the Upload link www mp3tunes com upload to add files to your Locker View edit and listen to your files by clicking on Player www mp3tunes com player Playing Contents on the AV Receiver Tip Before proceeding you need to select the MP3tunes service as described in Common Procedures in Internet Radio
206. n las cualidades musicales de esa canci n de ese artista o de ese g nero E Elementos del men I like this song Si aprueba pulgar arriba una canci n Pandora reproducir m s m sica parecida I don t like this song Si no aprueba pulgar abajo la canci n Pandora eliminar dicha canci n de la emisora actual Why is this song playing Descubra algunos de los atributos musicales que Pandora utiliza para crear sus emisoras de radio personalizadas Don t play the song for a month Si se cansa de una canci n puede silenciarla de modo que Pandora no la reproduzca durante un mes Create station from this artist Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este artista Es2 V Uso de Internet Radio Delete this station Esto eliminar de forma permanente una emisora de su cuenta de Pandora Toda la informaci n sobre sus aprobaciones desaprobaciones se perder si quiere volver a crear la emisora con la misma canci n o artista Create station from this song Crea una emisora de radio a partir de esta canci n Rename this station Le permite renombrar la emisora de radio actual Bookmark this artist Pandora marcar su artista favorito para su perfil en www pandora com Bookmark this song Pandora marcar la canci n actual y le permitir comprarlas todas en Amazon o iTunes con un solo paso Add to My Favorites A ade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos PANDORA internet radio PANDORA e
207. nd In the Mono listening mode only the front speakers 69 output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to Left Right Check the Speaker Configuration 64 E Only the center speaker produces sound If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game listening mode with a mono source such as an AM radio station or mono TV program the sound is concentrated in the center speaker In the Mono listening mode only the center speaker 69 output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to Center Make sure the speakers are configured correctly 64 Bi The surround speakers produce no sound When the T D Theater Dimensional Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected the surround speakers produce no sound Depending on the source and current listening mode 42 not much sound may be produced by the surround speakers Try selecting another listening mode Make sure the speakers are configured correctly 64 When Powered Zone 3 is used playback in the main room is reduced to 3 2 channels and the surround speakers produce no sound E The center speaker produces no sound When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected the center speaker produces no sound In the Mono listening mode only the front speakers 69 output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to Left Right Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
208. nd localization perfect for Mine ei Sources 9 2 sounds that pan across the surround channels Use it with DVDs that bear the DSD 3 In this mode audio from the input source is 3 2115 2117 2 DTS ES logo especially those with a DTS HS output without surround sound processing 92 ES Discrete soundtrack Dolby Digi The speaker presence of DTS ES Matrix 6 This mode is for use with DTS ES Matrix y Digital speakers crossover frequency speaker distance A V Sync and much of the soundtracks which use a matrix encoded Dolby D d y ES back channel for 6 1 7 1 channel playback iai x nC yia the andio are Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS ES Dolby Digital Plus 4 enabled See On screen Setup for more 3 2 5 2 7 2 details gt page 54 82 logo especially those with a DTS ES Matrix Dolby D soundtrack 3 2 b 2 7 2 2 9 2 Dolby TrueHD 3 2 5 2 7 2 Dolby TrueHD 9 2 3 21 5 2117 21 2 9 2 En 46 Y Turning On amp Basic Operations Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Source Layout Source Layout Dolby Pro Logic IIx 7 Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2 channel DTS Neo X 8 This mode expands various sources and Dolby Pro Logic Il source for 7 1 channel playback It provides various inputs up to 9 1 channel very natural and seamless surround sound DTS Neo X provides semi spherical sound
209. nd mix at any volume level A consequence of turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener THX Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel levels and frequency response This enables users experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume setting THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in any THX listening mode The new THX Cinema THX Music and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of content Digital Processing Crossover Network Digital Crossover provides a separate routing system by splitting the audio signal into separate frequency bands optimized for each speaker driver It provides a fine three dimensional sound field that extend each driver s performance to the uppermost With its built in time alignment function this system also adjusts the sound shifting that occurs when there is a physical offset between sound drivers At a digital processing level it corrects this offset by delaying the related audio signal Although this function is meant for speakers without crossover network it can also be used with bi amped speakers Tip This setting can be done while listening to an audio source Press MODE D Blue to switch from the current audio source to test noi
210. nd surround channels z z mi im ih olaa EXER Wi 0 m x 7 2 FH 7 2 FW Turning On amp Basic Operations Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Source Layout Source Layout Dolby Pro Logic IV IIx 7 Movie GE 72 FH THX Cinema 5 2 7 2 9 2 PLI Movie DSX Audyssey DSX 72 FW THX Cinema THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical Dolby Pro Logic II IIx 7 Music soundtracks for playback in a home theater DJRS PLI Music DSX Audyssey DSX THX Music environment In this mode THX Loudness Hala Dolby Pro Logic II IIx 7 Game Plus is configured for cinema levels and PLI Game DSX Audyssey DSX THX Games Re EQ Timbre Matching and Adaptive The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II IIx Decorrelation are active PLIx Movie DSX and Audyssey DSX modes can be used THX Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie 92 SB FH THX Music mode is tailored for listening to PLix Music DSX Audyssey DSX EX music which is typically mastered at Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music significantly higher levels than movies In PLIx Game DSX Audyssey DSX this mode THX Loudness Plus is The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx configured for music playback and only and Audyssey DSX modes can be used un is active ames Dolby EX psx Dolby EX Audyssey DSa 9 2 SB FH THX Games mode is meant for spatially The combination of Dolby EX and MS Audyssey DSX modes c
211. nden Sie 4 V um Sign in to your account auszuw hlen und dann dr cken Sie ENTER Wenn Sie ber einen bestehenden Last fm Konto verf gen k nnen Sie sich anmelden und Sign in to your account w hlen Geben Sie Ihre Ihre Benutzernamen und das Kennwort in der folgenden Tastaturanzeige ein Bi Verwendung der Tastaturanzeige 1 Verwenden Sie A lt und den ENTER um Ihren Nutzernamen und Passwort einzugeben 2 W hlen Sie OK 3 Dr cken Sie ENTER Die Anzeige Confirm your entries erscheint 4 Dr cken Sie ENTER Please wait wird angezeigt und danach erscheint die Last fm Internet Radio Anzeige Tipp Falls Sie mehrere Nutzerkonten verwenden m chten schlagen Sie bitte unter Verwendung mehrerer Konten nach gt Seite 1 Das Login kann vom Users Bildschirm aus erfolgen 2 Verwenden Sie A V um das Men auszuw hlen und dann dr cken Sie ENTER Search Station Sie k nnen einen Sender anhand Interpreten Tags oder Benutzernamen suchen Top Artists Station Sie k nnen Titel der am besten bewerteten Interpreten wiedergeben Top Tags Station Sie k nnen Titel der am besten bewerteten Tags wiedergeben Personal Station Sie k nnen Titel aus einem pers nlich angepassten Sender wiedergeben Your Library Your Neighbourhood und Your Recommendations C Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound amp Vision Corporation Japan All rights reserved Internetr
212. ne 3 Even if you repeatedly press the remote controller s ZONE to select zones the last zone selection will be retained once you have switched to other components by pressing other REMOTE MODE after pressing ZONE En 36 Y Advanced Operations Using the Remote Controller in Zone and Multiroom Control Kits To control the AV receiver with the remote controller while you re in Zone you ll need a commercially available multiroom remote control kit for each zone Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech These kits can also be used when there isn t a clear line of sight to the AV receiver s remote sensor such as when it s installed inside a cabinet Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone In this setup the IR receiver in Zone picks up the infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds them through to the AV receiver in the main room via the connecting block IR IN a 45 pum Connecting oh iver block Remote controller Main room Zone lt Signal flow The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be connected to the AV receiver s IR IN jack as shown below From the connecting block E Miniplug cable 5 E AV receiver lt Signal flow Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet In this setup the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV receiver located in
213. ne 3 left Front right Front high right Front wide Red right Zone 2 right Zone 3 right Center Green Surround left Blue Surround right Gray Surround back left Brown Surround back right Tan The supplied speaker cable labels are also color coded and you should attach them to the positive side of each speaker cable in accordance with the table above Then all you need to do is to match the color of each label to the corresponding speaker terminal En 14 Y Connections Speaker Connection Precautions Read the following before connecting your speakers You can connect speakers with an impedance of between 4 and 16 ohms If the impedance of any of the connected speakers is 4 ohms or more but less than 6 ohms be sure to set the minimum speaker impedance to 4ohms gt page 63 If you use speakers with a lower impedance and use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long period of time the built in protection circuit may be activated Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before making any connections Read the instructions supplied with your speakers Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity In other words connect positive terminals only to positive terminals and negative terminals only to negative terminals If you get them the wrong way around the sound will be out of phase and will sound unnatural Unnecessarily long or very thin
214. nent to a component video input you must assign that input to an input selector For example if you connect your Blu ray Disc DVD player to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2 you must assign IN2 to the BD DVD input selector If you ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a component video cable you can set the AV receiver so that composite video source is upconverted and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT You can set this for each input selector by selecting the option Composite video Component video C IN ML Y em Y C OUT 3 Composite video Component video 1 This applies only when Monitor Out setting is set to Analog gt page 60 Here are the default assignments Input selector Default assignment BD DVD INI CBL SAT IN2 STBIDVR GAME GAME2 r Be o fe TV CD PHONO eee Ene2 Y Advanced Operations E BD DVD CBL SAT STB DVR GAME1 GAME2 PC AUX TV CD PHONO gt IN1 IN2 Select the input to which the component has been connected Output composite video sources from the HDMI output Note For composite video upconversion for the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT the Monitor Out setting must be set to Analog page 60 and the Component Video Input setting must be set to See Connection Tips and Video Signal Path fo
215. ng the Speaker Setup Manually You can manually make changes to the settings found during Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup See also Speaker Configuration gt page 64 Speaker Distance gt page 65 Level Calibration page 66 Equalizer Settings gt page 66 Note Please note that THX recommends any THX main speakers be set to 80Hz THX If you set up your speakers using Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup please make sure manually that any THX speakers are set to 80Hz THX crossover page 64 Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and the interaction with the room THX recommends setting the level and the distance of the subwoofer manually Sometimes due to interaction with the room you may notice irregular results when setting the level and or distance of the main speakers If this happens THX recommends setting them manually Using a Powered Subwoofer If you re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs very low frequency sound at a low volume level it may not be detected by Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup If the Subwoofer appears on the Review Speaker Configuration screen as No increase the subwoofer s volume to the half way point set it to its highest crossover frequency and then try running Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup again Note that if the volume
216. nnel 7 1ch This is 7 1 channel surround sound This is a further sound enhancement to 5 1 channel sound with two additional speakers that provide greater sound envelopment and more accurate positioning of sounds DTS E This is DTS ES surround sound This surround system can produce a discrete or a matrix encoded sixth channel from existing DTS 5 1 encoded material H m x e This is Dolby Digital EX surround sound This provides a center back surround channel from 5 1 channel sources En 43 Y 9212 9 2 SB FH 9 2 SB FW 9 2 FH FW 1 After enabling the corresponding speakers press RECEIVER followed by SP speaker layout repeatedly to select the speakers you want to use front high front wide or surround back After enabling the corresponding speakers press RECEIVER followed by SP speaker layout repeatedly to select the layout you want to use These layouts are only available when Preout to External Amplifier gt page 64 is enabled En44 V Turning On amp Basic Operations B Onkyo Original DSP Listening Modes Turning On amp Basic Operations Listening Mode Description Orchestra Orchestra Suitable for classical or operatic music this mode emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the stereo image and simulates the natural reverberation of a large hall Unplugged Unplugged Su
217. ns ou les m mes artistes tous vos acceptations rejets pr c dents seront perdus Create station from this song Permet de cr er une station radio partir de cette chanson Rename this station Vous permet de renommer la station radio actuelle Bookmark this artist Pandora marquera votre artiste pr f r pour votre profil sur www pandora com Bookmark this song Pandora marquera la chanson en cours et vous permettra de toutes les acheter sur Amazon ou iTunes en une tape Add to My Favorites Permet d ajouter une station la liste My Favorites PANDORA internet radio PANDORA le logo PANDORA et l habillage commercial Pandora sont des marques commerciales ou des marques d pos es de la soci t Pandora Media Inc Utilis es avec autorisation Utilisation de Rhapsody Etats Unis uniquement 1 Utilisez A Y pour s lectionner Sign in to your account puis appuyez sur ENTER Vous devez poss der un compte pour utiliser Rhapsody Si vous ne disposez pas encore d un compte vous pouvez en cr er un partir de www rhapsody com onkyo Si vous poss dez d j un compte Rhapsody s lectionnez Sign in to your account puis appuyez sur ENTER Saisissez votre nom utilisateur en g n ral votre adresse lectronique et votre mot de passe dans l cran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration Web E Utilisation de l cran clavier 1 Utilisez Y 4 et ENTER pour saisir votre nom d utilis
218. nstructions on screen Refer to step 2 of Using the Automatic Speaker Setup page 39 When this setting is complete the setup wizard continues to Source Connection gt Do it Later Skips this setting Press ENTER and continue to Source Connection Source Connection This step checks the connection of source components Use A Y to select one of the following options and then press ENTER gt Yes Continue Performs the checkings gt No Skip Skips this step and continues to Remote Mode Setup 2 Select the input selector for which you want to check the connection and press ENTER The picture of the corresponding source should appear on screen with a verification prompt 3 When prompted use A V to select one of the following options and then press ENTER gt Yes Confirms that the source is properly displayed gt No Displays an error report Follow the troubleshooting instructions and recheck the source 4 Use A Y to select one of the following options and then press ENTER gt Yes Returns to step 2 gt No Done Checking The setup wizard continues to Remote Mode Setup Remote Mode Setup With this step you can enter remote control codes for the components you want to operate 1 Use A V to select one of the following options and then press ENTER gt Yes Performs the remote control code input Refer to step 5 of Looking up for Remote Control Codes gt page 90 gt
219. nt flap Gently push on the lower end of the front panel to open the flap 9 PHONES jack 52 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 and OFF buttons 85 TONE and Tone Level buttons 55 42 MONITOR OUT button 60 DISPLAY button 51 TUNING 4 Y 34 PRESET lt gt 34 cursor and enter middle buttons DIMMER button North American models 51 MEMORY button 34 0 TUNING MODE button 34 LISTENING MODE buttons 42 WHOLE HOUSE MODE button 52 SETUP MIC jack 40 SETUP button 58 HOME button 50 RETURN button USB port 19 69 AUX INPUT jacks 18 19 69 RT PTY TP button European models 37 En9 Y Safety Information and Introduction Safety Information and Introduction Display 49 For detailed information see the pages in parentheses 9 Input indicators 109 CD Speaker channel indicators HDMI indicator 80 2 Z2 Zone 2 indicator 85 DIGITAL indicator Z3 Zone 3 indicator 85 ANALOG indicator Listening mode and format indicators 42 77 Bi AMP indicator M Opt indicator 57 Audyssey indicator 39 72 m and cursor indicators 28 Dynamic EQ indicator 72 NET indicator 29 to 33 82 I Dolby Vol indicator Tuning indicators Dynamic Vol indicator 73 HD indicator North American models 35 42 Headphone indicator 52 SPS indicator North American models 35 9 Message area RDS indicator excluding North American models MUT
220. nt to select Sign in to your account Enter your user name and password in the next keyboard screen E Using the keyboard screen 1 Use A Y 4 and the ENTER to enter your user name and password 2 Select OK 3 Press ENTER The Confirm your entries screen appears 4 Press ENTER Please wait appears and then Last fm Internet Radio screen appears Tip If you want to use multiple user accounts see Using Multiple Accounts page 1 Login can be made from the Users screen 2 Use Y to select menu and then press ENTER Search Station You can search station by Artist Tag or User Name Top Artists Station You can play tracks of top rated artists Top Tags Station You can play tracks of top rated tags Personal Station You can play tracks from personalized station Your Library Your Neighbourhood and Your Recommendations A En5 Y Using Internet Radio Profile You can play tracks from Recently Listened Tracks Library and Neighbours Account Info Confirm your account information Sign Out It signs out from your account Use A V to select a station and press ENTER or gt to start playback Playback starts and the playback screen appears E Menu Items I Love this track Track information is saved in Last fm server and playback frequency increases Ban this track Track information is saved in Last fm server and playback frequ
221. ntents coming from different channels or input sources Note If the Dolby Volume setting is set to Off this setting cannot be selected B Half Mode gt Off gt On The Half Mode parameter turns Dolby Volume Half Mode processing on and off In off mode Dolby Volume applies a bass and treble attenuation to the audio when the system gain exceeds reference level This enables a more perceptually flat listening experience as human ears are more sensitive to bass and treble at higher levels Some listeners however prefer to have more bass and treble performance at higher gain levels Note If the Dolby Volume setting is set to Off this setting cannot be selected During Half Mode on playback Dolby Volume does not apply a bass and treble attenuation when the system volume exceeds reference level thereby boosting perception of high and low frequencies A En70 Y Advanced Operations Dialogue Normalization Dialogue Normalization DialogNorm is a feature of Dolby Digital which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to change the volume control between Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD programs When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD sometimes you may see a brief message in the front panel display which will read DialogNorm X dB X being a numeric value The display is sho
222. ntering Remote Control Codes for details on entering a remote control code page 91 See the Dock s instruction manual for more information RI Dock Set the RI Dock s RI MODE switch to HDD or HDD DOCK OSOURCE may not work with a remote control code without RD In this case make an 91 connection and enter the remote control code 81993 with RI E With the RI Control Make an RI connection and enter the remote control code 81993 with RD Set the AV receiver s Input Display to DOCK 2 page 51 E Without the RI Control You must enter the remote control code 82990 first 2 page 92 Press the appropriate REMOTE MODE button first RECEIVER SOURCE REMOTE MODE INPUT SELECTOR PREV CH PLAYLIST Controlling Other Components Bi RI Dock operation Available buttons TOP MENU DISPLAY O a lt gt ENTER SOURCE PLAYLIST lt gt MUTING m I lt lt gt gt ALBUM Fe e VOL A Y REPEAT MENU RANDOM MODE 4 With some iPod iPhone models generations and RI Docks certain buttons may not work as expected For detailed operation of iPod iPhone please refer to the instruction manual of the RI Dock 1 TOP MENU works as the mode button when used with the DS A2 RI Dock 2 DISPLAY turns on the backlight for a few seconds 3 This button does not turn the Onkyo DS A2 or DS A2X RI Do
223. nternet Radio Connectivity Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files 2 USB Inputs Front Rear for Memory Devices and iPod iPhone models Only the front panel USB input is compatible with iPod iPhone MHL Enabled AUX Front Input En7 V Safety Information and Introduction Miscellaneous 40 FM AM Presets Dolby Volume Audyssey MultEQ XT32 to correct room acoustic problems Audyssey Dynamic EQ for loudness correction Audyssey Dynamic Volume to maintain optimal listening level and dynamic range Crossover Adjustment 40 45 50 55 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 150 200 Hz A V Sync Control Function up to 800 ms Auto Standby Function On Screen Display via HDMI Preprogrammed with onscreen display setup RI Compatible Learning Remote with 4 Activities and Mode Key LEDs ISF Imaging Science Foundation Video Calibration e VLSC Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry for All Channels Safety Information and Introduction Front amp Rear Panels North American models European models Ens Y nO For detailed information see the pages in parentheses D ON STANDBY button 23 2 Remote control sensor 5 Display 10 MASTER VOLUME control and indicator 26 51 HYBRID STANDBY indicator 59 6 PURE AUDIO button and indicator 42 Input selector buttons 26 Fro
224. ntroller may not not work or its compatibility may be limited to part of the component s functionality Besides it is not possible to add new codes to the existing remote controller presets Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of printing they are subject to change by the manufacturer Codes de t l commande 1 Tout en maintenant enfonc le bouton REMOTE MODE auquel vous souhaitez associer un code pressez et maintenez enfonc le bouton DISPLAY pendant environ 3 secondes Le bouton REMOTE t moin Remote s allume Les noms de boutons sont en manjuscules sur les produits Integra Par exemple le bouton Remote Mode et le bouton Display Remarques Les codes de t l commande ne peuvent pas tre entr s pour RECEIVER et le bouton multi zone Seul les code de t l commande de t l viseurs peuvent tre entr s pour TV oA l exception de RECEIVER TV et du bouton multi zone vous pouvez affecter des codes de t l commande de n importe quelle cat gorie pour les boutons REMOTE MODE Cependant ces boutons font galement office de bouton de s lecteur d entr e par cons quent choisissez un bouton REMOTE MODE correspondant l entr e laquelle vous souhaitez raccorder votre appareil Par exemple si vous raccordez votre lecteur CD l entr e CD choisissez TV CD lorsque vous saisissez le code de t l commande Vous disposez de 30 secondes pour sais
225. ny 70490 70000 Onkyo 82990 81993 82351 y Ae Remote Control Codes Accessory Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box Polk Audio 82228 Amstrad 00847 01175 01662 CGV 01413 01567 Durabrand 01284 01693 Chess 01334 01626 Echostar 00775 00853 01323 Video Accessory Ansonic 02418 CityCom 01176 01409 02527 ADB 02254 02769 Arnion 01300 Clatronic 01413 Eco Star 01413 Aon 02769 ASCI 01334 Clayton 01626 Edision 01631 Apple 02615 AssCom 00853 Com Hem 01176 01915 Elap 01413 01567 AT amp T 00858 Astro 00173 01100 Dnus 01413 Elbe 02418 BT Vision 02294 Atlanta 02418 Comsat 01413 Energy Sistem 01631 02418 Canal 02657 Atsat 01300 Coship 01457 Engel 01251 Cisco 00858 02345 02378 AtSky 01334 Crown 01284 EuroLine 01251 Kreatel 01385 Audiola 02418 CS 01631 Europhon 01334 mio TV 02802 Aurora 00879 00642 01433 Cyfra 01409 Europsat 01413 01611 Motorola 01376 00858 01998 Austar 00879 00642 01259 Cyfrowy Polsat 00853 02527 Expressvu 00775 02378 Avanit 01631 D box 00723 01114 Fagor 01611 Neuf TV 03107 Awa 02418 Dantax 01626 Ferguson 01291 Pace 02657 Axil 01413 01457 02418 Denver 02418
226. o the Front setting is fixed at Full Band E Center Surround gt Full Band gt 40Hz 45Hz 50Hz 55Hz 60Hz 70Hz 80Hz THX 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz 130Hz 150Hz 200Hz gt None A Ene V Advanced Operations E Front Wide 1 3 4 6 8 Front High 1 3 5 6 7 8 gt Full Band gt 40Hz 45Hz 50Hz 55Hz 60Hz 70Hz 80Hz THX 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz 130Hz 150Hz 200Hz None Bi Surround Back 3 5 6 8 gt Full Band gt 40Hz 45Hz 50Hz 55Hz 60Hz 70Hz 80Hz THX 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz 130Hz 150Hz 200Hz gt None Note 1 Full Band can be selected only when Full Band is selected in the Front setting 2 When the Powered Zone 3 setting is set to Yes and Zone 3 is turned on this setting cannot be selected 8 This setting cannot be selected if the Speakers Type Front setting is set to Bi Amp or Digital Crossover 4 When the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes this setting cannot be selected 5 When the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes and Zone 2 is turned on this setting cannot be selected 6 If the Surround setting is set to None this setting cannot be selected 7 When the Powered Zone 3 setting is set to Yes this setting cannot be selected 8 If the Preout to External Amplifier setting is enabled for these speakers None cannot be selected Surround Back Ch gt Ich Select if only one
227. o National 10508 10208 Onn 11667 11709 Local India TV 10208 Mesatron 10178 NEC 10178 10653 10508 Onyx 11709 Local Malaysia TV 10698 10499 MEI 11037 Opera 10037 10714 Lodos 11037 pem Neckermann 10556 10037 Optimus 10650 Loewe 10037 10512 11884 Neun m NEI 10037 11037 Orbit 10037 Logik 11037 10698 10037 NEO 11324 Orion 10556 10037 10714 Logix 10668 TTE Netsat 10037 11037 12001 Luma 11037 en 10037 10668 10105 NetTV 11755 Orline 10037 t Lumatron 10037 10668 de Lir e Neufunk 10556 10037 10714 Ormond 10668 11037 Lumenio 10037 MGA 10150 10178 New Tech 10556 10037 Osaki 10556 10037 Lux May 10037 Mictomaxx 10037 10714 10668 Newave 10178 Osio 10037 Luxor 11037 10208 11037 11324 12001 Nikkai 10037 Osume 10037 LXI 10178 Microspot 11614 Nikkei 10714 Otto Versand 10556 10037 10195 M Electronic 10037 10714 10634 Mikomi 11037 11585 Nikko 10178 _ 10512 10195 10512 11652 Tm TNT Nokia 10208 Pacific D 10714 11037 107 Minerva isles a a2 Palladium 10556 10037 10714 Magnavox 10171 11454 11365 Ministry Of Sound 11667 Nordmende 10037 10714 10560 11506 11755 11867 Minok 10037 10195 11585 11667 Palsonic 10037 10698 12372 Mini 2 12001 10037 Magnum 10037 10714 10715 cha I Normerel 10037 Panasonic 11480 10037 10650 Manesth 10037 Mitsubishi ir a ee Nortek 10668 10508 10208 11636 Manhattan 10037 10668 11037 10512 11171 Nome 10037 _ 12170 Marantz 11454
228. ofer while playing a movie or some music with good bass experiment by placing your subwoofer at various positions within the room and choose the one that provides the most satisfying results You can connect the powered subwoofers with SW1 PRE OUT and SW2 PRE OUT respectively The level and distance can be set individually for each output If you re using only one subwoofer connect it to SW1 PRE OUT Tip If your subwoofer is unpowered and you re using an external amplifier connect the subwoofer pre out jack to an input on the amplifier Bi amping the Front Speakers Important When making the bi amping connections be sure to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers tweeter high and woofer low terminals Bi amping can be used only with speakers that support bi amping Refer to your speaker manual Bi amping provides improved bass and treble performance When bi amping is used the AV receiver is able to drive up to a 5 2 speaker system in the main room Once you ve completed the bi amping connections as shown and turned on the AV receiver you must set the speaker setting to enable bi amping gt page 63 Tweeter high Woofer low Front right Front left Using Speakers Without Crossover Network Important Speakers without crossover network are speakers with no built in crossover network With speakers without crossover network be careful NOT to connect tw
229. om Correction and Speaker Setup gt page 39 Here you can check the settings made by Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup function or set them manually which is useful if you change one of the connected speakers after using Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup function Note These settings are not available in either of the following cases a pair of headphones is connected the Audio TV Out setting is set to On page 80 HDMI Control RIHD is set to On gt page 79 and you re listening through your TV speakers Speaker Settings If you change these settings you must run Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup again page 39 If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but less than 6 set the minimum speaker impedance to 4 ohms If you bi amp the front speakers you must change the Speakers Type Front setting For details on speaker wire connection see Bi amping the Front Speakers page 16 When connecting speakers without crossover network you need to change the Speakers Type Front setting beforehand For details on Ens3 Y Advanced Operations connection refer to Using Speakers Without Crossover Network gt page 16 Note When bi amping is used the AV receiver is able to drive up to 5 2 speakers in the main room Before you change these settings turn down the volume E Speaker Imp
230. on the unit s rear panel e g AC 230 V 50 Hz or AC 120 V 60 Hz The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit from the AC power source Make sure that the plug is readily operable easily accessible at all times For models with POWER button or with both POWER and ON STANDBY buttons Pressing the POWER button to select OFF mode does not fully disconnect from the mains If you do not intend to use the unit for an extended period remove the power cord from the AC outlet For models with ON STANDBY button only Pressing the ON STANDBY button to select Standby mode does not fully disconnect from the mains If you do not intend to use the unit for an extended period remove the power cord from the AC outlet Preventing Hearing Loss Caution Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss Batteries and Heat Exposure Warning Batteries battery pack or batteries installed shall not be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine fire or the like Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands Never handle this unit or its power cord while your hands are wet or damp If water or any other liquid gets inside this unit have it checked by your Onkyo dealer Handling Notes f you need to transport this unit use the original packaging to pack it how it was when you originally bought it Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit for a long time because they may leave marks on
231. onal surround sound even with only two three speakers This works by controlling how sounds reach the listener s left and right ears Good results may not be possible if there s too much reverb so we recommend that you use this mode in an environment with little or no natural reverb 7 Rn zi ex 2 m m 7 mi mi En45 V Bi Listening Modes Turning On amp Basic Operations Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Source Layout Source Layout DTS In this mode audio from the input source is 3 2 5 2 7 2 Pure Audio In this mode the display and video circuitry 2 2 3 2 5 2 DTS output without surround sound processing 9 2 are turned off minimizing possible noise GE 7 2 9 2 The speaker configuration presence of sources for the ultimate in high fidelity DTS HD High speakers crossover frequency speaker 3 2 5 2 7 2 1C i H audio reproduction As the analog video EXC Resolution Audic distance AIN Sync and ue of tie 9 2 circuitry is turned off only video signals DTS ES DTS HD HR set Ma mes 219 3 2 5 2 7 2 2 input through HDMI IN can be output from ta een Setup for more 92 eta
232. onar la categor a y luego pulse ENTER Aparece una pantalla con una lista de emisoras de la categor a seleccionada 3 Utilice A V para seleccionar la emisora deseada y luego pulse ENTER Aparecer la pantalla de reproducci n de la emisora seleccionada y ahora usted podr escuchar SiriusXM Internet Radio Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a distancia Botones activados Bl II a lt gt gt E Elementos del menu Add to My Favorites A ade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos Es4 V Uso de Internet Radio Siriusxm INTERNET RADIO Las suscripciones a SiriusXM Internet Radio se venden por separado y se rigen por las condiciones de Sirius consulte www sirius com Lea atentamente este acuerdo antes de comprar la suscripci n Sirius XM y todas las marcas y logotipos relacionados son marcas comerciales de Sirius XM Radio Inc y sus filiales Todos los derechos reservados Uso de Last fm Internet Radio Last fm es un servicio musical que sabe lo que le gusta Su nuevo receptor de AV Onkyo es muy inteligente Si tiene una cuenta gratuita de Last fm har un seguimiento de todas las canciones que acaba de escuchar Cuando visite el sitio web de Last fm podr ver listas personales de la m sica que ha disfrutado compartirlas con sus amigos y tambi n ver lo que les gusta a ellos Con sus miles de biograf as cr ticas y una infinita variedad de emisoras de radio personalizadas y sin pu
233. one Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup f the AV receiver is muted it will be unmuted automatically when Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup starts Changes to the room after Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup requires you run Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup again as room EQ characteristics may have changed Ena V Turning On amp Basic Operations Error Messages While Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup is in progress one of the error messages below may appear MultEQ XT32 Auto Setup 1 AUDYSSEY Retry Cancel Error message The options are gt Retry Try again Cancel Cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup Ambient noise is too high The background noise is too loud Remove the source of the noise and try again Speaker Matching Error The number of speakers detected was different from that of the first measurement Check the speaker connection Writing Error This message appears if saving fails Try saving again If this message appears after 2 or 3 attempts contact your Onkyo dealer Speaker Detect Error This message appears if a speaker is not detected No means that no speaker was detected Tip See Speaker Configuration for appropriate settings gt page 13 Ae Changi
234. onnected The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats 49 y Using the Home Menu The Home menu provides quick access to frequently used menus The Home menu appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN If your TV is connected to other video outputs use the AV receiver s display when changing settings 1 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME The Home menu will be superimposed on the TV screen Tip Alternatively you can use HOME on the AV receiver 2 Use lt gt or Y and ENTER to make the desired selection Press HOME to close the menu Bi Network Service You need to connect the AV receiver to your home network gt page 114 gt With this selection you can use various Internet radio services or play the contents stored in media connected to your home network DLNA pages 29 to 32 Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver is turned on Please wait until it becomes operable Press ENTER to display the network service screen If you want to use the Internet radio services use gt to select the desired service Pressing ENTER again switches to that selection If you want to play music files on a server use A W 4 to select DLNA and then press ENTER E USB With this selection you can play contents of portable players iPod etc and USB storage devices connected to the AV receiver s USB port
235. oom acoustical problems over the listening area in both the frequency and time domain The result is clear well balanced sound for everyone Audyssey MultEQ XT32 can be used with Audyssey Dynamic EQ and Audyssey Dynamic Volume gt pages 72 73 Before using this function connect and position all of your speakers Audyssey MultEQ XT32 offers two ways of measuring the Audyssey Quick Start and Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration Audyssey Quick Start uses the measurement from one position to perform the speaker setting only Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration uses the measurement from eight positions to correct room response in addition to the speaker setting The more positions are used in measuring the better the listening environment will become We recommend using a measurement from eight positions to create the best listening environment The Quick Start takes 2 minutes and Full Calibration takes about 20 minutes Total measurement time varies depending on the number of speakers Measurement procedure To create a listening environment in your home theater that all listeners will enjoy Audyssey MultEQ XT32 takes measurements at up to eight positions within the listening area Position the microphone at ear height of a seated listener with the microphone tip pointed directly at the ceiling using a tripod Do not hold the microphone in your hand during measurements as this will produce in
236. ou sans pr avis Les services de webradio peuvent ne pas tre accessibles dans certaines zones Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio 1 Si vous ne poss dez pas de compte cr ez en un partir du site Web de Slacker www slacker com l aide de votre ordinateur Si vous poss dez d j un compte Slacker s lectionnez Sign in to your account puis appuyez sur ENTER L cran clavier s affiche Pouvez saisir des informations partir de la t l commande ou des touches sur l appareil principal Si les informations que vous avez saisies ne comportent pas d erreur utilisezA V lt pour s lectionner OK puis appuyez sur ENTER L cran de confirmation des informations du compte s affiche Si vous ne poss dez pas de compte s lectionnez Access without Sign In puis appuyez sur ENTER pour utiliser une version restreinte du service Veuillez noter que l utilisation est restreinte Conseil Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur consultez Utilisation de plusieurs comptes page 1 L identification peut tre r alis e partir de l cran Users Utilisez A V pour s lectionner un l ment du menu puis appuyez sur ENTER Pour vous d connecter utilisez A V pour s lectionner Sign out depuis cet cran puis appuyez sur ENTER Utilisez A V pour s lectionner une station puis appuyez sur ENTER ou B pour d marrer la lecture depuis cette station
237. ox This completes the Windows Media Player 11 configuration You can now play the music files in your Windows Media Player 11 library through the AV receiver Tip Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free from the Microsoft web site Remote Playback You need to connect the AV receiver to your home network gt page 114 The on screen information appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI outputs Remote Playback means you can play the music files stored on a media server or personal computer with the AV receiver by operating the controller device in the home network Windows Media Player 12 Setup This section explains how to configure Windows Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the music files stored on your personal computer 1 Start Windows Media Player 12 2 On the Stream menu select Turn on media streaming A dialog box appears Tip If the media streaming is already activated clicking on More streaming options in the Stream menu will display a list of the playback devices connected to the network You can skip step 3 3 Move your cursor and click on Turn on media streaming A list of media server appears Wording may vary slightly depending on the network location 4 On the Media streaming options select the AV receiver and confirm that it is set to Allow Click OK to close the dialog box This completes the Windows Media Player 12 configuration
238. poration HDMI the HDMI Logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries ImstsaPrevue InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Silicon Image Inc in the United States and other countries Made for a iPod JiPhone iPhone iPod iPod classic iPod nano iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Made for iPod and Made for iPhone mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone respectively and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance Re Equalization and the Re EQ logo are trademarks of THX Ltd Vise VLSCTM is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited MAL Mobile High Definition Link MHL the MHL Logo and Mobile High Definition Link are trademark or registered tr
239. ps and 320 kbps are supported E FLAC flac or FLAC FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression Sampling rates of 8 kHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 64 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported Quantization bit 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit E Ogg Vorbis ogg or OGG Sampling rates of 8 kHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz and bitrates of between 48 kbps and 500 kbps are supported Incompatible files cannot be played B LPCM Linear PCM Sampling rates of 8 kHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 64 kHz 88 2 kHz and 96 kHz are supported Quantization bit 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit Only for playback via network B Apple Lossless m4a mp4 M4A MP4 Sampling rates of 8 kHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 64 kHz 88 2 kHz and 96 kHz are supported Quantization bit 16 bit 24 bit En 116 V Appendix E DSD dsf or DSF The sampling rate of 2 8224 MHz is supported E Dolby TrueHD vr mlp VR MLP Sampling rates of 48 kHz 64 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported About DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international cross industry collaboration Members of DLNA develop a concept of wired and wireless interoperable networks where digital content such as photos musi
240. r more information on video signal flow and upconversion gt page 107 Digital Audio Input If you connect a component to a digital audio input you must assign that input to an input selector For example if you connect your CD player to the OPTICAL IN 1 you must assign OPTICAL1 to the TV CD input selector Here are the default assignments Input selector Default assignment BD DVD COAXIAL1 CBL SAT COAXIAL2 STB DVR COAXIAL3 GAME1 OPTICAL1 GAME2 PC AUX FRONT Fixed TV CD OPTICAL2 PHONO j E BD DVD CBL SAT STB DVR GAME1 GAME2 PC TV CD PHONO gt COAXIAL1 COAXIAL2 COAXIAL3 OPTICAL1 OPTICAL2 Select the input to which the component has been connected Select if the component is connected to an analog audio input Note When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in HDMI Input page 61 the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority in this assignment In this case if you want to use the coaxial or optical audio input make the appropriate selection in the Audio Selector page 77 Supported sampling rates for PCM signals stereo mono from a digital input optical and coaxial are 32 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz 16 20 24 bit AUX is used only for input from the front panel Speaker Setup MainMenu Speaker Setup Some of the settings in this section are set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Ro
241. r s display when changing settings This section describes the procedure for using the remote controller unless otherwise specified Using the Quick Setup REMOTE MODE INPUT SELECTOR D o D m RECEIVER ENTER A V lt gt Q SETUP RETURN SETUP ROUE RETURN 22 7 Press RECEIVER followed by Q SETUP The Quick Setup will be superimposed on the TV screen 2 Use A Y and ENTER to make the desired selection Press Q SETUP to close the menu Press RETURN to return to the previous menu Explanatory Notes Music Optimizer ia gt On D Setting target Setting options default setting underlined BD DVD Input Audio Video Information Listening Mode A En54 V Advanced Operations Input You can select input sources and view the following information the name of input selectors input assignments radio information and ARC function setting In addition previews of the video streams coming from HDMI inputs HDMI IN 1 2 3 4 AUX INPUT are displayed Use A V to select an input source and view the related information Pressing ENTER switches to the selected input source Audio gt page 55 You can change the following settings Sound Program Bass Front Treble Front Bass Front Wide Treble Front Wide Bass Front High Treble Front High Bass Center Treble Center Bass Surround Tre
242. r standby mode Changing the Source Components You can change the source components activated by the Easy Macro mode 1 While holding down REMOTE MODE for the playback component you wish to assign press and hold down the ACTIVITIES to be changed MY MOVIE MY TV or MY MUSIC about 3 seconds ACTIVITIES flashes twice indicating that the change is complete Examples If you wished to use MY MUSIC to start the Onkyo cassette recorder you would press and hold down MY MUSIC about 3 seconds while holding down TV CD until it flashes twice En53 Y Turning On amp Basic Operations Restoring Default You can restore ACTIVITIES to the default settings While holding down HOME press and hold down ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights about 3 seconds 2 Release HOME and ALL OFF and press ALL OFF again ALL OFF flashes twice On screen Setup With the AV receiver connected to a TV there are two ways of changing the settings on screen using the Quick Setup or the Setup menu HOME E Quick Setup The Quick Setup provides quick access to frequently used settings You can change settings and view the current information E Setup menu HOME The Setup menu HOME provides a convenient way to change the AV receiver s various settings Settings are organized into 9 categories The on screen menus appear only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN If your TV is connected to other video outputs use the AV receive
243. rations THX Audio Setup E Surr Back Speaker Spacing gt lt 1ft lt 0 3m gt 1ft 4ft 0 3m 1 2m gt gt 4ft gt 1 2m You can specify the distance between your surround back speakers Note This setting is not available in any of the following cases Surround Back is set to None gt page 64 Surround Back Ch is set to Ich gt page 65 Powered Zone 2 is set to Yes gt page 63 and Zone 2 turned on gt page 85 E THX Ultra2 Select2 Subwoofer gt No gt Yes If you re using a THX certified subwoofer set this setting to Yes Note If the Subwoofer setting is set to No this setting cannot be selected gt page 64 E BGC gt Off gt On You can apply THX s Boundary Gain Compensation BGC to compensate the perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners sitting very close to a room boundary i e wall Note This setting is only available if THX Ultra2 Select2 Subwoofer is set to Yes If the Subwoofer setting is set to No this setting cannot be selected gt page 64 5 Bi Loudness Plus gt Off gt On When the Loudness Plus setting is set to it is possible to enjoy even subtle nuances of audio expression at low volume This is only available when the THX listening mode is selected Bi Preserve THX Settings Yes gt No If this setting is set to Yes Dynamic EQ D
244. re available from the Apple web site For supported iPod iPhone models see the instruction manual of the Onkyo Dock RI Dock With the RI Dock you can easily play the music of your iPod iPhone or watch the slideshows and videos of your iPod iPhone on a TV In addition the on screen display OSD allows you to view navigate and select your iPod iPhone model s contents on your TV and with the supplied remote controller you can control your iPod iPhone from the comfort of your sofa You can even use the AV receiver s remote controller to operate your iPod iPhone Note Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the AV receiver s remote controller for the first time page 92 e Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an RI cable 2 page 22 Set the RI Dock s RI MODE switch to HDD or HDD DOCK Set the AV receiver s Input Display to DOCK page 51 E System Function Depending on your iPod iPhone model and generation some of the linked operations may not be available Auto Power On If you press the remote controller s amp amp Playback while the AV receiver is on standby the AV receiver will automatically turn on select your iPod iPhone as the input source and your iPod iPhone will start playback Direct Change If you start iPod iPhone playback while listening to another input source the AV receiver will automatically switch to the input to which the RI Dock is conne
245. re is any data in the USB device remove it first 2 Download the firmware file from the Onkyo web site The file name is as follows ONKA VR Zip Unzip the downloaded file The following six files are created NKAVR inner of NKA VR of2 NKA VR of3 NKA VR of4 NKA Re of NKA VR of 3 Copy the extracted files to the USB device Be careful not to copy the zip file oocococ 4 Remove the USB device from your PC and connect it to the USB port on the AV receiver When the AV receiver has two USB ports you can use either one 5 Make sure the AV receiver and TV are turned on If the AV receiver is in standby mode press OON STANDBY on the AV receiver to light up the front display 6 Select the USB input source Now Initializing appears on the AV receiver s display and then the name of the USB device is displayed It takes 20 to 30 seconds to recognize the USB device 7 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the remote controller The Home menu appears on the TV screen Q Select Firmware Update and press ENTER En 105 V 10 11 12 Appendix Select Update via USB and press ENTER Note that this option will not be available if there is no firmware file newer than the currently installed version Select Update and press ENTER The update process will begin During the update process the on screen display may disappear depending on the upda
246. remote controller doesn t work reliably try replacing the batteries Don t mix new and old batteries or different types of batteries f you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time remove the batteries to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion B Aiming the remote controller To use the remote controller point it at the AV receiver s remote control sensor as shown below Remote control sensor AV receiver Approx 16 ft 5 m Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver Please read this manual thoroughly before making connections and plugging in the unit Following the instructions in this manual will enable you to obtain optimum performance and listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver Please retain this manual for future reference Safety Information and Introduction Table of Contents Safety Information and Introduction Important Safety Instructions 2 Precautions Supplied Accessories Table of Contents Features Front amp Rear 8 Remote Controller 12 Connections Connecting the AV Connecting Your About AV Connections iod aaas Connecting
247. res in Internet Radio Menu Note Available services may vary depending on the region 1 Press NET A list of the network services appears and the NET indicator lights If it flashes verify that the Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver Select the desired service and press ENTER The top page of the selected service appears Using Multiple Accounts The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts which means you can freely switch between several logins After registering user accounts login is performed from the Users screen 1 Press MENU while the Users screen is displayed The following menu items appear Add new user Remove this user You can either store a new user account or delete an existing one Tip Some of the services don t allow the use of multiple user accounts You can store up to 10 user accounts To switch between accounts you must first log out from the current account and log in again on the Users screen Ent V Using Internet Radio Pandora internet radio Getting Started US ONY nennen 2 Using Rhapsody U S only 3 Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio North American Only 4 Using Last fm Internet Radio 5 Using Slacker Personal Radio 6 Using MPSTUNOS isiingie 7 Pandora internet radio Getting Started U S only Pandora is a free personalized Internet radio ser
248. ress ENTER The menu is displayed according to the server functions Note The search function does not work with media servers which do not support this function Photos and movies stored on a media server cannot be accessed from the AV receiver Depending on the sharing settings in the media server the AV receiver may not able to access the content See the instruction manual of the media server En31 V 5 Turning On amp Basic Operations Use A Y to select an item and then press ENTER or gt to start playback gt My favorite song 1 Artist name My favorite album Note Depending on the media server a I may not work If the message No Item appears this means that no information can be retrieved from the server In this case check your server network and AV receiver connections Windows Media Player 11 Setup This section explains how to configure Windows Media Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files stored on your computer 1 2 Start Windows Media Player 11 On the Library menu select Media Sharing The Media Sharing dialog box appears Select the Share my media check box and then click OK A list of the supported devices appears Select the AV receiver in the list and then click Allow The corresponding icon will be checked Ly To be continued 5 5 Click OK to close the dialog b
249. riority among other assignments gt HDMI This can be selected when HDMI IN has been assigned as an input source If both HDMI HDMI IN and digital audio inputs COAXIAL IN or OPTICAL IN have been assigned HDMI input is automatically selected as a priority gt COAXIAL This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has been assigned as an input source If both coaxial and HDMI inputs have been assigned coaxial input is automatically selected as a priority gt OPTICAL This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has been assigned as an input source If both optical and HDMI inputs have been assigned optical input is automatically selected as a priority gt Analog The AV receiver always outputs analog signals You can set priorities of audio output when there are both digital and analog inputs Note This setting can be made only for an input source that is assigned to HDMI IN COAXIAL IN or OPTICAL IN This setting cannot be used with the NET and USB input selectors When using the Whole House Mode this setting cannot be selected With the GAME2 input selector Analog cannot be used 1 You can select ARC if you select the TV CD input selector But you cannot if you ve selected Off in the Audio Return Channel setting page 80 Setting the Incoming Digital Signal Fixed Mode B Fixed Mode Off The format is detected automatically If no digital input signal is present the corresponding analog input is us
250. rmines it to be necessary Even if the AV receiver is connected to an compatible TV or player recorder it will not power on if it is not necessary It may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to output audio from the TV Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work depending on the component model connected In such cases operate the AV receiver directly About HDMI Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a new digital interface standard for connecting TVs projectors Blu ray Disc DVD players set top boxes and other video components Until now several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components With HDMI a single cable can carry control signals digital video and up to eight channels of digital audio 2 channel PCM multichannel digital audio and multichannel PCM The HDMI video stream i e video signal is compatible with DVI Digital Visual Interface so TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI to DVI adapter cable This may not work with some TVs and displays resulting in no picture The AV receiver uses HDCP High bandwidth Digital Content Protection 2 so only HDCP compatible components can display the picture The AV receiver s HDMI interface is based on the following Audio Return Channel 3D x v Color DeepColor Lip Sync DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD High Resolu
251. rnbedienung unterscheidet sich je nach AV Receiver Modell Die Fernbedienung ist mit den Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung der verschiedenen Komponenten vorkonfiguriert Indem ein Code aus der Liste der Fernbedienungscodes eingegeben wird k nnen Sie die entsprechende Voreinstellung f r die Komponente aktivieren Wenn es mehrere Codes gibt die sich auf einen Hersteller beziehen versuchen Sie sie einzeln einzugeben bis einer mit Ihrer Komponente bereinstimmt Dies h ngt vom Modell und Herstellungsjahr Ihrer Komponente ab und die Kompatibilit t ist nicht garantiert Es kann sein dass bei einigen Modellen die Fernbedienung nicht funktioniert oder ihre Kompatibilit t sich auf nur auf Teile der Funktionalit t der Komponente beschr nkt Abgesehen davon ist es nicht m glich den bestehenden Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung neue Codes hinzuzuf gen Obwohl die angegebenen Fernbedienungscodes dem Stand bei Drucklegung entsprechen sind Anderungen durch den Hersteller vorbehalten Y Afstandsbedieningscodes 1 Houd terwijl u de REMOTE MODE toets ingedrukt houdt waarvoor u een code wilt toewijzen de DISPLAY toets ingedrukt ongeveer 3 seconden De toets REMOTE MODE afstandsbedieningsmodus Het indicatielampje afstandsbediening gaat branden Op producten van Integra staan de namen van de toetesn in hoofdletters Bijvoorbeeld de toetsen Remote Mode en Display Opmerkingen Er kunnen geen afstands
252. roduzca sus listas personales My Library Marque sus lbumes y canciones preferidas en el cat logo de Rhapsody usando Mi biblioteca Account Info Confirme los datos de su cuenta Sign Out Salga de su cuenta Rhapsody Es3 V Uso de Internet Radio 3 Utilice A V para seleccionar una emisora y luego pulse ENTER para iniciar la reproducci n Se inicia la reproducci n y aparece la pantalla de reproducci n Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a distancia Botones activados gt IT Bl lt lt gt gt lt lt gt gt RANDOM REPEAT Nota En Rhapsody Channels algunos de los botones no funcionan E Elementos del men Add track to My Library Marca las canciones que se est n reproduciendo actualmente Add album to My Library Marca los lbumes que se est n reproduciendo actualmente Add playlist to My Library Marca las listas de reproducci n que se est n reproduciendo actualmente Add channel to My Channels Marca las emisoras de Rhapsody que se est n reproduciendo actualmente Add to My Favorites A ade una canci n emisora o lista de reproducci n a la lista Mis favoritos Consejo Puede eliminar las canciones los lbumes y las emisoras de Rhapsody marcados de Mi biblioteca Uso de Sirius XM Internet Radio solo Norteam rica Su receptor de AV Onkyo incluye una prueba gratuita de SiriusXM Internet Radio La pantalla Account Info muestr
253. router Depending on your ISP you may need to specify a proxy server to use Internet radio If your computer is configured to use a proxy server use the same settings for the AV receiver gt page 82 Server Requirements Bi Server playback The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a computer or media server and supports the following technologies Windows Media Player 11 Windows Media Player 12 Windows Media Connect 2 0 DLNA certified media server If the operating system of your computer is Windows Vista Windows Media Player 11 is already installed Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP can be downloaded for free from the Microsoft web site The computer or media server must be on the same network as the AV receiver Up to 20 000 folders can be displayed and folders may be nested up to 16 levels deep Note Depending on the media server the AV receiver may not recognize it or may not be able to play its music files Minimum system requirements for Windows Media Player 11 on Windows XP Operating system Windows XP Home Edition SP2 Windows XP Professional SP2 Windows XP Tablet PC Edition SP2 Update Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005 KB900325 October 2006 Update Rollup for Windows XP Media Center Edition KB925766 233 MHz Intel Pentium II Advanced Micro Devices AMD etc 64 MB 200 MB of free space CD or DVD drive 28 8 kbps 16 bit sound car
254. ry gt page 80 3 Connect the HDMI output of the Blu ray Disc DVD player recorder to the HDMI IN 1 jack of the AV receiver Note t is necessary to assign the HDMI input when connecting the Blu ray Disc DVD player recorder to other jacks page 61 Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV CD selector at this time otherwise appropriate CEC Consumer Electronics Control operation will not be guaranteed 2 Change each item in the HDMI menu according to the following settings HDMI Control RIHD On Audio Return Channel ARC Auto See details of each setting gt pages 79 80 3 Confirm the settings 1 Turn on the power for all connected components 2 Turn off the power of the TV and confirm that the power of the connected components is turned off automatically with the link operation 3 Turn on the power of the Blu ray Disc DVD player recorder 4 Start playback on the Blu ray Disc DVD player recorder and verify the following The AV receiver automatically turns on and selects the input to which the Blu ray Disc DVD player recorder is connected The TV automatically turns on and selects the input to which the AV receiver is connected 5 Following the operating instructions of the TV select Use the TV speakers from the menu screen of the TV and confirm that the audio is output from the speakers of the TV and not from the speakers connected to the AV receiver 6 Select Use the speakers connec
255. s dez d j un compte SIRIUS vous pouvez y acc der en s lectionnant Sign In Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe dans l cran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration Web Si vous ne connaissez pas votre nom d utilisateur ou votre mot de passe appelez Sirius XM au 888 539 7474 pour obtenir une assistance Conseil Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur consultez Utilisation de plusieurs comptes page 1 L identification peut tre r alis e partir de l cran Users B Utilisation de l cran clavier 1 Utilisez A lt gt et ENTER pour saisir votre nom d utilisateur et votre mot de passe 2 S lectionnez OK 3 Appuyez sur ENTER L cran Confirm your entries s affiche 4 Appuyez sur ENTER Please wait s affiche puis l cran SiriusXM Internet Radio affiche la cat gorie que vous pouvez s lectionner 2 Utilisez A Y pour s lectionner la cat gorie puis appuyez sur ENTER L cran de la liste des canaux de la cat gorie s lectionn e s affiche 3 Utilisez A Y pour s lectionner le canal de votre choix puis appuyez sur ENTER L cran de lecture du canal s lectionn s affiche et vous pouvez couter SiriusXM Internet Radio Vous pouvez contr lez les pistes avec les touches sur la t l commande Boutons activ s Bl lt lt gt gt E El ments du menu Add to My Favorites Permet d ajouter un cana
256. s screen 2 Use A V to select menu and then press ENTER Search Station You can search station by Artist Tag or User Name Top Artists Station You can play tracks of top rated artists Top Tags Station You can play tracks of top rated tags Personal Station You can play tracks from personalized station Your Library Your Neighbourhood and Your Recommendations En2 V Using Internet Radio Profile You can play tracks from Recently Listened Tracks Library and Neighbours Account Info Confirm your account information Sign Out It signs out from your account Use A V to select a station and press ENTER or gt to start playback Playback starts and the playback screen appears Enabled buttons gt gt Bl gt B Menu Items I Love this track Track information is saved in Last fm server and playback frequency increases Ban this track Track information is saved in Last fm server and playback frequency reduces Add to My Favorites Adds a station to My Favorites list B Using scrobbling control Use A F to select Enable and then press ENTER Internet radio services provided by a third party may be terminated with or without notice Internet radio services may not be available in some areas Internetradio verwenden Internetradio verwenden Verwendung mehrerer Konten Der AV Receiver unterst tzt mehrere Nutzerkonten was bedeutet dass Sie frei zwischen
257. s ENTER to open it Tip You can also use the A V enter middle and TUNING MODE buttons on the front panel TUNING MODE allows you to switch modes Use A V to select a music video file and press ENTER or gt to start playback Note While the message Connecting appears on the AV receiver s display do not disconnect the USB cable supplied with your iPod iPhone or the USB device from the USB port If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port no sound will be output from the headphones jack Extended Mode Music Control The music content information is displayed lists are displayed and you can control the music content while looking at the screen Top screen list Playlists Artists Albums Genres Songs Composers Shuffle Songs Now Playing Note n this mode video contents are not displayed even if they are input from the AUX INPUT VIDEO jack on the AV receiver s front panel Extended Mode Video control The video content information is displayed lists are displayed and you can control the video content while looking at the screen Top screen list Movies Music Videos TV Shows Video Podcasts Rentals Note To view the video contents of your iPod iPhone connect it to the USB port and AUX INPUT VIDEO jack on the AV receiver s front panel using the official Apple Composite AV Cable Depending on your iPod iPhone model and generation the displayed items may vary and t
258. s multicast channels the currently selected multicast channel will be displayed to the right of the HD indicator En35 Y Turning On amp Basic Operations E Selecting Multicast Channels FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs on the same frequency by using what are called multicast channes 1 Press TUNER on the remote controller repeatedly to select FM and use the lt gt buttons to select multicast channel If you select a multicast channel that is not currently broadcasting a plus symbol or period will appear next to the HD indicator indicating that the channel has been reserved When broadcasting commences that channel will be selected automatically Reserved channel indication HD Radio channel number Note Multicast channels are not available on AM E Setting the Blend Mode HD Radio transmissions contain analog and digital signals If available the digital signal is used automatically In areas with poor reception you may want to choose the analog signal 1 Press ENTER repeatedly to select Auto or Analog The options are gt Auto Select to use the digital signal when available gt Analog Select to use the analog signal Note Multicast channels 2 through 8 are digital only so you must select multicast channel 1 before you can change the Blend mode E Displaying HD Radio Information Press the DISPLAY button repeatedl
259. services appears and the NET indicator lights If it flashes verify that the Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver Select the desired service and press ENTER The top page of the selected service appears Using Multiple Accounts The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts which means you can freely switch between several logins After registering user accounts login is performed from the Users screen 1 Press MENU while the Users screen is displayed The following menu items appear Add new user Remove this user You can either store a new user account or delete an existing one Tip Some of the services don t allow the use of multiple user accounts You can store up to 10 user accounts To switch between accounts you must first log out from the current account and log in again on the Users screen Ent V Using Last fm Internet Radio Using Internet Radio Using Last fm Internet Radio Last fm is a music service that learns what you love Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever If you have a free Last fm account it will keep track of all the songs you ve just played When you visit the Last fm website you can see personal charts of the music you ve enjoyed share them with friends and see what they like too With thousands of biographies reviews and an endless choice of personalised ad free radio stations Last fm is a great way to discover music Pick up your free
260. ses Pressing MODE D Blue again or the cursor buttons will stop the test noises and switch back to the original audio source En 67 Y Advanced Operations Note This setting can only be made when Speakers Type Front is set to Digital Crossover gt page 63 E Crossover gt 250Hz 320Hz 400Hz 500Hz 630Hz 800Hz 1000Hz 1250Hz 1600Hz 2000Hz 2500Hz 3200Hz 4000Hz 5000Hz Output Band for Test gt High Low High Low Select the output for the audio signal Tip Pressing MODE D Blue button plays band limited test noises which center on the specified frequency We recommend choosing a crossover value that creates no volume difference between High and Low Note Refer to your speaker manual when setting without the use of test noises Cutoff frequencies of the woofers low pass filter LPF and the tweeters high pass filter HPF are set according to the frequency specified for Crossover Bi Overlap gt No gt Yes With this setting a frequency band near the specified crossover frequency is output by both tweeters and woofers Based on the frequency selected for Crossover the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter LPF will be set to 1 3 octave up and that of the high pass filter HPF to 1 3 octave down Example With a Crossover of 3200Hz the cutoff frequency of the woofers
261. st perform the Room Correction and Speaker Setup gt page 39 These technologies cannot be used when a pair of headphones is connected or either Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected B Audyssey gt Off Movie Select this setting for movie material The Audyssey indicator will light gt Music Select this setting for music material The Audyssey indicator will light Note When Audyssey Quick Start has been used for measurement Audyssey cannot be selected Audyssey equalizing does not work with DSD sources En 72 V Advanced Operations B Dynamic EQ gt Off gt On Audyssey Dynamic EQ becomes active The Dynamic EQ indicator will light With Audyssey Dynamic EQ you can enjoy great sound even when listening at low volume levels Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics It does so by selecting the correct frequency response and surround volume levels moment by moment so that the content sounds the way it was created at any volume level not just at reference level E Reference Level Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset gt OdB This should be selected for movie contents gt 5dB Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range such as classical music gt 10dB Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic
262. ste et nous vous jouerons une station enti re de musique inspir e par votre choix My Library Reposez vous de retour et appr ciez les s lections partir de toute la musique que vous avez entendue depuis que vous avez joint Last fm Tag Radio Funk polonaise Death pop Pensez un style et nous vous divertirons avec pendant des heures Commencez votre essai gratuit imm diatement la cr ation votre compte et d couvrez par vous m me ce que cela fait d avoir la musique du monde au bouts des doigts Les derniers prix et les informations compl tes sont disponibles sur www last fm subscribe 1 Utilisez A Y pour s lectionner Sign in to your account puis appuyez sur ENTER Vous poss dez d j un compte Last fm vous pouvez vous y connecter pour s lectionner Sign in to your account Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe dans l cran clavier suivant B Utilisation de l cran clavier 1 Utilisez A W 4 et le bouton ENTER pour saisir votre nom d utilisateur et votre mot de passe 2 S lectionnez OK 3 Appuyez sur ENTER L cran Confirm your entries s affiche 4 Appuyez sur ENTER Please wait apparait puis l cran Last fm Internet Radio apparait Conseil Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur consultez Utilisation de plusieurs comptes page 1 L identification peut tre r alis e partir de l cran Users
263. t channel speaker outputs are present Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height can be used to upmix a variety of sources from movies and music but are particularly well suited to upmix game content EI m 20 9 NI Ko my T E T T 2 FH FW Ko NI Dolby EX Dolby EX Dolby D EX These modes expand 5 1 channel sources for 6 1 7 1 channel playback They re especially suited to Dolby EX soundtracks that include a matrix encoded surround back channel The additional channel adds an extra dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound experience perfect for rotating and fly by sound effects a E dp EJ S 2 mp JoJo 5 lt HPP H m x EN 2 5 2 5 2 SB FW Ko ma En47 V Audyssey DSX Audyssey DSX is a scalable system that adds new speakers to improve surround impression Starting with a 5 1 system Audyssey DSX first adds Wide channels for the biggest impact on envelopment Research in human hearing has proven that information from the Wide channels is much more critical in the presentation of a realistic soundstage than Back Surround channels found in traditional 7 1 systems Audyssey DSX then creates a pair of Height channels to reproduce the next most important acoustical and perceptual cues In addition to these new Wide and Height channels Audyssey DSX applies Surround Envelopment Processing to enhance the blend between the front a
264. t it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening position measured with C weighting and slow reading Equalizer Settings With the Equalizer settings you can adjust the tone of speakers individually with a 7 band equalizer The volume of each speaker can be set page 66 B Manual Equalizer gt On You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker manually Continue with the following procedure 1 Press Y to select Channel and then use lt gt to select a speaker 2 Use A F to select a frequency and then use the lt gt to adjust the level at that frequency The volume at each frequency can be adjusted from 6dB to OdB to 6dB in 1 dB steps Tip You can select 63Hz 160Hz 400Hz 1000Hz 2500Hz 6300Hz or 16000Hz And for the subwoofer 25Hz 40Hz 63Hz 100Hz or 160Hz Low frequencies e g 63 Hz affect bass sounds high frequencies e g 16000 Hz affect treble sounds 3 Use to select Channel and then use lt to select another speaker Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker You cannot select speakers that you set to No or None in the Speaker Configuration 2 page 64 Off Tone off response flat Note When the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected the equalizer settings have no effect f Audyssey is enabled it prevails over this setting 2 page 72 En 66 Y Advanced Ope
265. t wire Release Be careful not to injure yourself when using thumbtacks EFF Thumbtacks etc k Indoor FM antenna supplied Assembling the AM loop antenna 95 9 AM loop antenna supplied Once your AV receiver is ready for use you ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best possible reception Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver TV speaker cables and power cords Tip If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna try using it with a commercially available outdoor AM antenna 21 y Connecting Onkyo RI Components 1 Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected with an analog audio cable connection in the hookup examples page 19 ez 2 Make the Ri connection see the illustration 3 If you re using an RI Dock or cassette tape deck change the Input Display page 51 With RI Remote Interactive you can use the following special functions Auto Power On When you start playback on a component connected via fAl while the AV receiver is on standby the AV receiver will automatically turn on and select that component as the input source B Direct Change When playback is started on a component connected via RI
266. table for home theater viewing E Re EQ gt Off gt On This function can be used with the following listening modes Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD Multichannel DTS DTS HD High Resolution Audio DTS HD Master Audio DTS Express DSD Dolby EX Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height Dolby PLIIx Movie DTS Neo X Cinema Re EQ THX gt Off gt On This function can be used with the following listening modes THX Cinema THX Surround EX and THX Ultra2 Cinema Note These settings are stored individually for each input selector In THX listening mode however the setting will return to On when the AV receiver is turned off These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones is connected En 57 Y Advanced Operations Screen Centered Dialog By using the front high speaker this function moves the center image of dialogs etc upwards so that the image of dialogs is fixed to the display height Bi Screen Centered Dialog As the value increases the center image moves upwards 0 1to 5 Screen Centered Dialog on Note The Screen Centered Dialog can be used when a compatible listening mode is selected This setting cannot be used while a pair of headphones is connected Advanced Operations Explanatory Notes Bi Screen Saver If there is no video signal on the current input source and Using the Setup Menu HOME em no operation for a specific time three minutes b
267. tance Distance Tweeter gt Woofer VLL Low Distance High Distance Tip Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover Network are played You can switch from the current audio source to test noises by pressing MODE D Blue A En 68 Y Advanced Operations Audio Adjust Setup io META Audio Adjust With the Audio Adjust functions and settings you can adjust the sound and listening modes as you like 1 a gt Multiplex Mono B Multiplex Input Channel gt Main gt Sub gt Main Sub This setting determines which channel of a stereo multiplex source is output Use it to select audio channels or languages with multiplex sources multilingual TV broadcasts and so on E Mono Input Channel gt Left Right gt Left gt Right This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing any 2 channel digital source such as Dolby Digital or 2 channel analog PCM source in the Mono listening mode Output Speaker gt Center Mono audio is output by the center speaker gt Left Right Mono audio is output by the front left and right speakers This setting determines which speakers output mono audio when the Mono listening mode is selected Note If the Center setting is set to None gt page 64 this setting cannot be selected Dolby B PL lix Music 2ch Input These settings apply to only 2 channel stereo sources If you re
268. ted from the AV receiver from the menu screen of the TV and confirm that the audio is output from the speakers connected to the AV receiver and not from the TV speakers Note Perform the above operations when you use the AV receiver for the first time when the settings of each component are changed when the main power of each component is turned off when the power cable is disconnected from the power supply or when there has been a power outage En 112 V Appendix Operate with the remote controller For buttons that can be operated page 93 Note Audio from DVD Audio or Super Audio CD may not output from the TV speakers You will be able to output the audio from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of the DVD player to 2ch PCM It may not be possible depending on the player models Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers audio will be output from the speakers connected to the AV receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on the AV receiver To output audio from the TV speakers re do the corresponding operations on the TV In case of an UHD connection with RI and RI audio control compatible components do not connect the RI cable at the same time On the TV when you select anything other than the HDMI jack to which the AV receiver is connected the input on the AV receiver will be switched to TV CD The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction when it dete
269. ted program When this occurs you can still view the update progress on the AV receiver s display The on screen display will reappear after the update is complete and upon turning the AV receiver off and on again Do not turn off the AV receiver and do not remove the USB device during the update process The message Completed appears on the AV receiver s display indicating that the update has been completed Remove the USB device Turn off the AV receiver using OON STANDBY on the front panel Do not use ORECEIVER on the remote controller Once turned off the AV receiver will automatically turn on again Congratulations You now have the latest firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver Troubleshooting Case 1 If an error occurs Error is displayed on the AV receiver s display Alpha numeric characters on the front display are denoted by asterisks Refer to the following table and take appropriate action E Errors during an update via USB Error Code Description 10 20 The USB device was not detected Make sure the USB flash memory or USB cable is properly connected to the USB port If the USB storage device has its own power supply use it to power the USB device 14 The firmware file was not found in the root folder of the USB device or the firmware file is for another model Retry and download the file on the support page of the web site following the on site instructions
270. tes to complete the firmware update The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update is finished Before Starting Set the HDMI Control RIHD setting to Off gt page 79 Turn off the controller device connected via RS232 and network Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio iPod iPhone USB or servers etc Update Procedure 1 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the remote controller The Home menu appears on the TV screen 2 Select Firmware Update and press ENTER Note that the Firmware Update option will be grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver is turned on Please wait until it becomes operable Q Select Update via NET and press ENTER Note that this option will not be available if there is no firmware file newer than the currently installed version 4 Select Update and press ENTER The update process will begin During the update process the on screen display may disappear depending on the updated program When this occurs you can still view the update progress on the AV receiver s display The on screen display will reappear after the update is complete and upon turning the AV receiver off and on again 5 The message Completed appears on the AV receiver s display indicating that the update has been completed 6 Turn off the AV receiver using 0ON STANDBY on the front panel Do not
271. that station will also be output in Zone 2 3 You cannot select different radio stations for Zone 2 and Zone 3 respectively If Zone 2 and the main room share the same input source only an analog input signal is output If an HDMI component selected in Zone 2 outputs the sound other than PCM the sound is not output from FRONT WIDE ZONE 2 and ZONE 2 LINE OUT Both audio and video outputs from an HDMI component may interrupt when the main room and Zone 2 are set to share the same source or not When you have selected NET or USB as input selector the last selector selected will be set for Main room and Zone 2 3 When Zone 2 3 is activated and its input selector is selected the power consumption of standby mode slightly increases While Zone 2 3 is on RI functions will not work The component connected to HDMI input other than HDMI IN 1 2 3 AUX INPUT is selected as an input source for Zone 2 the linked operations of may not work properly In this case set the linked operations to Off on the source component When setting the AV receiver to standby mode while Zone 2 3 is active the Z2 or Z3 indicator is dimly lit Activating Zones in the main room when the listening mode is set to Pure Audio will automatically switch it to Direct GAME cannot be selected as input sources for Zone 3 When GAME is the input source of Main room and Zone 3 is set to share the same source no sound will be output from Zo
272. the Preout to External Amplifier setting gt page 64 About AV Connections Connecting AV components HDMI cable Video amp Audio AV receiver TV projector etc e LLLI Blu ray Disc DVD player Game console Other cables Video Audio TV projector etc o ES On Blu ray Disc DVD player Game console 1 If your TV doesn t support Audio Return Channel ARC you need to connect an optical digital cable together with the HDMI cable to the AV receiver Before making any AV connections read the manuals supplied with your AV components Don t connect the power cord until you ve completed and double checked all AV connections Push plugs in all the way to make good connections loose connections can cause noise or malfunctions To prevent interference keep audio and video cables away from power cords and speaker cables AV Cables and Jacks B HDMI HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio HDMI dH e E Component video Component video separates the luminance Y and color difference signals PB PR providing the best picture quality some TV manufacturers label their component video sockets slightly differently Y Y Green E Analog RGB This is a conventional analog interface to connect a PC and a display device
273. the case This unit s top and rear panels may get warm after prolonged use This is normal f you do not use this unit for a long time it may not work properly the next time you turn it on so be sure to use it occasionally Y Safety Information and Introduction For U S models FCC Information for User CAUTION The user changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna ncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
274. the main room s press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 twice Zone 2 Selector Source or Zone 3 Selector Source appears on the AV receiver s display 2 To turn off Zone 2 3 press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 The Z2 Z3 indicator on the AV receiver s display flashes Press OFF The zone is turned off Tip The corresponding trigger output goes low 0 volts E Operating on the remote controller To control Zone 2 3 you must press ZONE on the remote controller first ZONE turns red when Zone 2 is on and green when Zone 3 is on ORECEIVER ZONE 7 Press ZONE repeatedly then point the remote controller at the AV receiver and press ORECEIVER Zone 2 3 turns on the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on the AV receiver s display Tip The corresponding trigger output goes high 12 V 2 To select an input source for Zone 2 3 press ZONE repeatedly followed by an INPUT SELECTOR button To select AM or FM press ZONE and the TUNER input selector repeatedly 85 Y Advanced Operations Q To turn off Zone 2 3 press ZONE repeatedly followed by ORECEIVER The zone is turned off Tip The corresponding trigger output goes low 0 volts Adjusting the Volume for Zones E Operating on the remote controller Press ZONE repeatedly 2 UseVOL A Y E Operating on the AV receiver Press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 the Z2 Z3 indicator on the AV receiver s display flashes 2 Use MASTER VOLUME control within 8 seconds If your Zone 2 3 sp
275. ther of the following conditions HDMI Through is enabled the HDMI indicator is off Network Standby is enabled the NET indicator is off HYBRID STANDBY Note If Zones are turned on or if a mobile device connected to the Front Input MHL is charging the HYBRID STANDBY indicator won t light Setup Menu Items Advanced Operations Main menu item Sub menu item Listening Mode Preset BD DVD Main menu item Sub menu item gt page 77 CBL SAT Input Output Assign Monitor Out STB DVR page 60 HDMI Input GAME Component Video Input GAME2 Digital Audio Input PC Speaker Setup Speaker Settings AUX gt page 63 Speaker Configuration TUNER Speaker Distance TV CD Level Calibration PHONO Equalizer Settings NET THX Audio Setup USB Digital Processing Crossover Miscellaneous Volume Setup Network gt page 78 OSD Setup Audio Adjust Multiplex Mono Hardware Setup Tuner dd sn Dolby gt page 79 HDMI DTS Auto Standby Audyssey DSX Network Theater Dimensional Initial Setup LFE Level Remote Controller Remote ID Direct Setup Remote Mode Setup Sound Program Edit gt page 82 Source Setup Audyssey Lock Setup Setup gt page 72 Intelli Volume gt page 82 A V Sync Name Edit Picture Adjust Audio Selector En59 Y Input Output Assign 1 gt
276. tible with iPod iPhone When the USB input is selected you can input video signals from the AUX INPUT VIDEO jack Video signals input from AUX INPUT VIDEO will be output from MONITOR OUT V COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT and the HDMI output jacks Select which of COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT and the HDMI output jacks will output the video signal in the Monitor Out setting gt page 60 Connect a turntable MM that has a built in phono preamp to TV CD IN or connect it to PHONO IN with the phono preamp turned off If your turntable MM doesn t have a phono preamp connect it to PHONO IN If your turntable has a moving coil MC type cartridge you ll need a commercially available MC head amp or MC transformer to connect to PHONO IN See your turntable s manual for details If your turntable has a ground wire connect it to the AV receiver s GND screw With some turntables connecting the ground wire may produce an audible hum If this happens disconnect it When you connect your personal computer to PC IN and select the PC input selector the video of the personal computer is output from the HDMI outputs However if you have assigned the HDMI inputs to the PC input selector the AV receiver will output signals received from the HDMI inputs instead of signals from PC IN based on the priority order of HDMI gt component video PC IN analog RGB To have the signals output from PC IN select for PC in the HDM
277. tion Audio Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus DSD and Multichannel PCM Supported Audio Formats 2 channel linear PCM 32 192 kHz 16 20 24 bit e Multichannel linear PCM up to 7 1 ch 32 192 kHz 16 20 24 bit Bitstream DSD Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS DTS HD High Resolution Audio DTS HD Master Audio Your Blu ray Disc DVD player must also support the HDMI output of the above audio formats En 113 V Appendix About Copyright Protection The AV receiver supports HDCP High bandwidth Digital Content Protection 2 a copy protection system for digital video signals Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP 1 DVI Digital Visual Interface The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG 3 in 1999 2 HDCP High bandwidth Digital Content Protection The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI DVL It s designed to protect video content and requires a HDCP compatible device to display the encrypted video 8 DDWG Digital Display Working Group Lead by Intel Compaq Fujitsu Hewlett Packard IBM NEC and Silicon Image this open industry group s objective is to address the industry s requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high performance PCs and digital displays Note The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI Digital Visual Interface so TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI
278. tions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat 5 5 b NAM EWN ma 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to ER avoid injury from tip over a Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supp
279. tions E Tuning into stations by frequency You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by entering the appropriate frequency 1 On the remote controller press TUNER repeatedly to select AM or FM followed by D TUN Actual display depends on the country 2 Within 8 seconds use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station For example to tune to 87 5 FM press 8 7 5 or 8 7 5 0 If you have entered the wrong number you can retry after 8 seconds Presetting AM FM Stations You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite AM FM radio stations as presets 1 Tune into the AM FM station that you want to store as a preset See the previous section 2 Press MEMORY The preset number flashes 15 JT Actual display depends on the country 3 While the preset number is flashing about 8 seconds use PRESET lt gt to select a preset from 1 through 40 O To be continued 50 4 Press MEMORY again to store the station or channel The station or channel is stored and the preset number stops flashing Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite AM FM radio stations Bi Selecting Presets 1 To select a preset use PRESET lt gt on the AV receiver or the remote controller s CH Tip Youcan also use the remote controller s number buttons to select a preset directly Deleting Presets 1 Select the preset that you want to delete
280. tions are not supported Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub USB devices with security functions are not supported Limitation of liability The program and accompanying online documentation are furnished to you for use at your own risk Onkyo will not be liable and you will have no remedy for damages for any claim of any kind whatsoever concerning your use of the program or the accompanying online documentation regardless of legal theory and whether arising in tort or contract In no event will Onkyo be liable to you or any third party for any special indirect incidental or consequential damages of any kind including but not limited to compensation reimbursement or damages on account of the loss of present or prospective profits loss of data or for any other reason whatsoever See the Onkyo web site for latest information A En 103 Y Appendix Updating the Firmware via Network The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using network connection on the rear panel Note Make sure your AV receiver and TV are turned on and an Ethernet cable is connected to the rear panel of the AV receiver Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver while it is being updated Never plug or unplug an HDMI or Ethernet cable during the update process Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it is being updated Never unplug the power cord during the update process t takes up to 60 minu
281. to Use gt page 60 Depending on video signals the picture may not be properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of InstaPrevue B Setup With this selection you can access the common settings of the on screen Setup menu Press ENTER to display the Setup menu gt page 58 Tip You can also access frequently used settings from Quick Setup gt page 54 B Firmware Update With this selection you can update the firmware of the AV receiver Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver is turned on Please wait until it becomes operable Press ENTER to start the procedure gt page 103 Using the Sleep Timer With the sleep timer you can set the AV receiver to turn off automatically after a specified period 1 Press RECEIVER once followed by SLEEP repeatedly to select the required sleep time The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes in 10 minute steps The SLEEP indicator lights on the AV receiver s display when the sleep timer has been set The specified sleep time appears for about 5 seconds then the previous display reappears Tip If you need to cancel the sleep timer press SLEEP repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator goes off To check the time remaining until the AV receiver sleeps press SLEEP Note that if you press again on SLEEP as the time being displayed is 10 minutes or less the sleep timer will go off Setting the Display Brightness You c
282. to DVI adapter cable Note that DVI connections only carry video so you ll need to make a separate connection for audio However reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed In addition video signals from a PC are not supported The HDMI audio signal sampling rate bit length etc may be restricted by the connected source component If the picture is poor or there s no sound from a component connected via HDMI check its setup Refer to the connected component s instruction manual for details Network USB Features The following diagram shows how you can connect the AV receiver to your home network In this example it s connected to a LAN port on a router which has a 4 port 100Base TX switch built in Internet radio A Computer or media server Network Requirements B Ethernet Network For the best results a 100Base TX switched Ethernet network is recommended Although it s possible to play music on a computer that s connected to the network wirelessly playback may be unreliable so it is recommended to use wired connections B Ethernet Router A router manages the network data routing and supplying of IP addresses Your router must support the following NAT Network Address Translation NAT allows several networked computers to access the Internet simultaneously via a single Internet connection The AV
283. to your account and then press ENTER To use Rhapsody you need an account If you don t have one yet you can create a new account at www rhapsody com onkyo If you have an existing Rhapsody account select Sign in to your account and press ENTER Enter your user name usually your email and password in the next keyboard screen or in Web Setup B Using the keyboard screen 1 Use A lt gt and ENTER to enter your user name and password 2 Select OK 3 Press ENTER The Confirm your entries screen appears 4 Press ENTER Tip If you want to use multiple user accounts see Using Multiple Accounts page 1 Login can be made from the Users screen 2 Use A V to select the menu then press ENTER Search You can search for music by Artist Album or Track Music Guide You can play tracks from Genres Top Artists Top Albums Top Tracks New Releases and Staff Picks Rhapsody Channels Listen to radio channels programmed by Rhapsody s top notch editors Playlists Play your own personal playlists My Library Bookmark your favorite albums and tracks from the Rhapsody catalog using My Library Account Info Confirm your account information Sign Out Sign out from your Rhapsody account Y Using Internet Radio 3 Use A F to select a channel and press ENTER or to start playback Playback starts and the playback screen appears You can control the tracks with th
284. tos componentes Al introducir un c digo de la lista de c digos del mando a distancia se puede activar el ajuste predeterminado de ese componente e Cuando hay m ltiples c digos relacionados con un fabricante pruebe a introducirlos uno a uno hasta que coincida con su componente Dependiendo del modelo y el a o de su componente la compatibilidad no est garantizada Con algunos modelos es posible que el mando a distancia no funcione o que su compatibilidad est limitada a una parte de las funciones del componente Adem s no es posible a adir nuevos c digos a los ajustes predeterminados existentes del mando a distancia Los c digos de mando a distancia suministrados son correctos en el momento de la impresi n pero el fabricante puede realizar cambios Codici del telecomando 1 Tenendo premuto il tasto REMOTE MODE al quale si desidera assegnare il codice premere e tenere premuto DISPLAY per circa 3 secondi Il tasto REMOTE MODE indicatore Remote si accende Sui prodotti Integra i nomi dei tasti sono scritti con l iniziale maiuscola Ad esempio tasto Remote Mode e tasto Display Note codici di controllo del telecomando non possono essere inseriti per RECEIVER e i tasti multi zona Per TV possibile immettere solo codici telecomando del televisore Tranne che per RECEIVER TV e per il tasto multi zona possibile assegnare codici di controllo di ogni categoria per i tasti REMO
285. tting by the user and then monitors how the volume of program material is being perceived by listeners in real time to decide whether an adjustment is needed Whenever necessary Dynamic Volume makes the necessary rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the desired playback volume level while optimizing the dynamic range Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically the perceived bass response tonal balance surround impression and dialog clarity remain the same whether watching movies flipping between television channels or changing from stereo to surround sound content En 73 Advanced Operations IntelliVolume E IntelliVolume gt 12dB to 0dB to 12dB in 1 dB steps With Intelli Volume you can set the input level for each input selector individually This is useful if one of your source components is louder or quieter than the others Use 4 to set the level If a component is noticeably louder than the others use lt 4 to reduce its input level If it s noticeably quieter use gt to increase its input level Note Intelli Volume does not work for Zone 2 3 AN Sync E A V Sync gt Omsec to 800msec in 5 msec steps When using progressive scanning on your Blu ray Disc DVD player you may find that the picture and sound are out of sync With this setting you can correct this by delaying the audio signals Press ENTER to view the TV picture w
286. tup front screen If you cannot control the component use A V to select Try Next Code and press ENTER The next code is displayed Entering Remote Control Codes You ll need to enter a code for each component that you want to control 1 Look up the appropriate remote control code in the separate Remote Control Codes list The codes are organized by category e g DVD player TV etc 2 Whileholding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a code press and hold down DISPLAY about 3 seconds The REMOTE MODE button lights Note Remote control codes cannot be entered for RECEIVER and the multi zone button Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV Except for RECEIVER TV and the multi zone button remote control codes from any category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons However these buttons also work as input selector buttons gt page 26 so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input to which you connect your component For example if you connect your CD player to the CD input choose TV CD when entering its remote control code 3 Within 30 seconds use the number buttons to enter the 5 digit remote control code The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice If the remote control code is not entered successfully the REMOTE MODE button will flash once slowly Note Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of release they are subje
287. umber of preview thumbnails displayed Position with Sub Window set to Multi gt Top Bottom Left Right with Sub Window set to Single gt Upper Left Upper Right Lower Left Lower Right With this setting you can set the position of preview thumbnails on the TV screen Note Depending on video signals the picture may not be properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of InstaPrevue Auto Standby Auto Standby gt Off gt On When Auto Standby is set to On the AV receiver will automatically enter standby mode if there is no operation for 30 minutes with no audio and no video signal input Auto Standby will appear on the AV receiver s display and OSD 30 seconds before the Auto Standby comes on Default setting On European models Off North American models Note Set to On the Auto Standby function may activate itself during playback with some sources The Auto Standby function does not work when Zone 2 3 is on Network After modifying the network settings you must confirm the changes by executing Save This section explains how to configure the AV receiver s network settings manually If your router s DHCP server is enabled you don t need to change any of these settings as the AV receiver is set to use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default i e DHCP is set to Enable If however your router s DHCP server is disabled
288. uration 50 is the weakest color 50 is the strongest color E Color Temperature 4 6 gt Warm gt Normal Cool With this setting you can adjust the color temperature E Gamma 6 gt 3 to 0 to 3 With this setting you can adjust the incoming picture s R red G green and B blue color signal in relation to the output color signal E Red Brightness 4 6 gt 50 to 0 to 50 With this setting you can adjust the brightness of red color 250 is the darkest 50 is the brightest Bi Red Contrast 50 to 0 to 50 With this setting you can adjust the contrast of red color 250 is the least 50 is the greatest E Green Brightness 4 6 50 to 0 to 50 With this setting you can adjust the brightness of green color 50 is the darkest 50 is the brightest E Green Contrast 4 6 50 to 0 to 50 With this setting you can adjust the contrast of green color 250 is the least 50 is the greatest B Blue Brightness 46 gt 50 to 0 to 50 With this setting you can adjust the brightness of blue color 50 is the darkest 50 is the brightest En 76 Y Advanced Operations Blue Contrast 6 gt 50 to 0 to 50 With this setting you can adjust the contrast of blue color 250 is the least 50 is the greatest Note Picture Adjust cannot be used when The NET input selector is selected or
289. uration gt page 64 When a listening mode which doesn t support front high front wide or surround back speakers is used this setting cannot be selected Muting the AV Receiver You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver 1 Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING The output is muted and the MUTING indicator flashes on the AV receiver s display Tip To unmute press MUTING again or adjust the volume Muting is automatically cancelled when the AV receiver is set to standby Using Headphones 1 Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a standard plug 1 4 inch or 6 3 mm to the PHONES jack While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES jack C indicator speaker channel indicator FL and FR lights Note Always turn down the volume before connecting your headphones While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES jack the speakers are turned off The Powered Zone 2 3 speakers are not turned off When you connect a pair of headphones the listening mode is set to Stereo unless it s already set to Stereo Mono Direct or Pure Audio If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port on the AV receiver no sound will be output from the headphones jack 5 Using Easy Macros By using ACTIVITIES in Easy macro mode you can sequentially operate Onkyo components via simple commands from a single button press These commands are user definable See Using Normal Macros gt page 96
290. ure Block noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG content Bi Resolution 4 6 6 9 10 gt Through Select this to pass video through the AV receiver at the same resolution and with no conversion gt Auto Select this to have the AV receiver automatically convert video at resolutions supported by your TV gt 480p 480p 576p 720p 10801 1080p Select the desired output resolution gt 1080p 24 Select this for 1080p output at 24 frames per second gt 4K Upscaling Select this for an output resolution four times that of 1080p Depending on the resolution supported by your TV it will result in either 3840 x 2160 or 4096 x 2160 pixels You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI output and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture resolution as necessary to match the resolution supported by your TV This setting is available only when Source has been selected in Resolution of the Monitor Out setting 2 page 60 B Brightness 4 6 gt 50 to 0 to 50 With this setting you can adjust the picture brightness 50 is the darkest 50 is the brightest Bi Contrast 146 gt 50 to 0 to 50 With this setting you can adjust contrast 50 is the least 50 is the greatest WHue 46 gt 50 to 0 to 50 With this setting you can adjust the color hue between 250 and 50 Bi Saturation 1 4 6 50 to 0 to 50 With this setting you can adjust sat
291. urge that might interfere with other electrical equipment on the same circuit If this is a problem plug the AV receiver into a different branch circuit Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with the AV receiver The supplied power cord is designed exclusively for use with the AV receiver and should not be used with any other equipment Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver while the other end is still plugged into a wall outlet Doing so may cause an electric shock Always disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet first and then the AV receiver Turning On Off the AV Receiver OON STANDBY O ON STANDBY O RECEIVER SOURCE NE 3 GREEN DISPLAY ACTIVITIE ALL OFF M MY movie REMOTE MODE INPUT SELECTOR D uc a ORECEIVER PC TV O D RECEIVER INPUT TOP MENU 1 Press OON STANDBY on the front panel or Press RECEIVER followed by ORECEIVER on the remote controller The AV receiver comes on and its display lights Turning Off 1 Press OON STANDBY on the front panel or Press RECEIVER followed by ORECEIVER on the remote controller The AV receiver will enter standby mode To prevent any loud surprises when you turn on the AV receiver always turn down the volume before you turn it off Tip The HYBRID STANDBY indicator may light depending on the status of settings gt page 59 For details on power management settings see Auto Stan
292. use ORECEIVER on the remote controller Once turned off the AV receiver will automatically turn on again Congratulations You now have the latest firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver Troubleshooting Case 1 If an error occurs Error is displayed on the AV receiver s display Alpha numeric characters on the front display are denoted by asterisks Refer to the following table and take appropriate action E Errors during an update via network Error Code Description 10 20 The Ethernet cable was not detected Reconnect the cable properly 11 13 21 Internet connection error 28 Check the following items Make sure the IP address subnet mask gateway address and DNS server are configured properly Make sure the router is turned on Make sure the AV receiver and the router are connected with an Ethernet cable Make sure your router is configured properly See the instruction manual of the router If your network allows only one client connection and there is any other device already connected the AV receiver will not be able to access the network Consult your Internet Service Provider ISP If your modem does not function as a router you will need a router Depending on your network you may need to configure the proxy server if necessary See the document provided by your ISP If you are still unable to access the Internet the DNS or proxy server may be temporarily
293. v 6 v 6 v v Composite 480i 576i v v v5 v5 v5 Wes v5 v 6 v 6 v v v PC IN Analog RGB v v V5 v5 v5 v5 v7 v7 v 1 Available resolutions 640 x 480 60 Hz 800 x 600 60 Hz 1024 x 768 60 Hz 1280 x 1024 60 Hz 2 Supported resolutions 3840 x 2160 24 25 30 Hz 4096 x 2160 24 Hz 8 When video signals of personal computers connected to PC IN are output from HDMI OUT SUB they may not display properly on some TVs Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB Monitor Out Sub 5 Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB Monitor Out Both 6 The output is limited to 480p 576p for an effective signal in the effect of copy protect 7 PCIN Analog RGB input signal is output at 720p resolution when you select Analog in the Monitor Out setting gt page 60 and Through in the Resolution setting gt page 60 En 110 V Using an RIHD compatible TV Player or Recorder fRIFLD which stands for Remote Interactive over HDMI is the name of the system control function found on Onkyo components The AV receiver can be used with CEC Consumer Electronics Control which allows system control over HDMI and is part of the HDMI standard CEC provides interoperability between various components however operation with components other than MIHD compatible components cannot be guaranteed Appendix About RIHD Compatible Components Operations that can
294. vice that plays the music you know and helps you discover music you ll love Use A V to select I have a Pandora Account or new to Pandora and then press ENTER If you are new to Pandora select I m new to Pandora You will see an activation code on your TV screen Please write down this code Go to an Internet connected computer and point your browser to www pandora com onkyo Enter your activation code and then follow the instructions to create your Pandora account and your personalized Pandora Internet radio stations You can create your stations by entering your favorite songs and artists when prompted After you have created your account and stations you can return to your Onkyo receiver and press enter to begin listening to your personalized Pandora Internet radio If you have an existing Pandora account you can add your Pandora account to your Onkyo receiver by selecting I have a Pandora Account and logging in with your email and password Tip If you want to use multiple user accounts see Using Multiple Accounts gt page 1 Login can be made from the Users screen 2 To play a station use A V to select the station from your station list and then press ENTER Playback starts and the playback screen appears Create a New Station Enter the name of a song artist or genre and Pandora will create a unique radio station for you based on the musical qualities of that song artist or genre
295. wer Supply Massive High Power Transformer 3 Stage Inverted Darlington Amplifier Design Processing THX Ultra2 Plus Certified Incorporates Qdeo technology for HDMI Video Upscaling to 4K Compatible HQV Vida Video Processing with 1080p Video upscaling of All Video Sources via HDMI HDMI Audio Return Channel 3D DeepColor x v Color Lip Sync DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD High Resolution Audio Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus DSD and Multi CH PCM Dolby TrueHD and DTS HD Master Audio Dolby Pro Logic Iz and Audyssey DSX DTS Neo X Non Scaling Configuration A Form Listening Mode Memory Direct Mode Pure Audio Mode Music Optimizer for Compressed Digital Music files 192 kHz 24 bit D A Converters Powerful and Highly Accurate 32 bit Processing DSP Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology Digital Processing Crossover Network DSD Direct for Super Audio CD Connections 9 HDMI Inputs 1 on front panel and 2 Outputs Zone 2 HDMI Output Onkyo f31HID for System Control 6 Digital Inputs 3 Optical 3 Coaxial Component Video Switching 2 Inputs 1 Output Banana Plug Compatible Speaker Posts n Europe using banana plugs to connect speakers to an audio amplifier is prohibited Powered Zone 2 3 Bi Amping Capability for FL FR with FHL FHR Analog RGB Video Input D sub 15 for PC 2 Independent Subwoofer Pre Outs North American models HD Radio Capability I
296. wing how the program level relates with THX calibration level If you want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels you may wish to adjust the volume For example if you see the following message DialogNorm 4 dB in the front panel display to keep the overall output level at THX calibrated loudness just turn down the volume control by 4 dB However unlike a movie theater where the playback loudness is preset you can choose your preferred volume setting for best enjoyment DTS Bi Neo X Music Center Image 0to2to5 The DTS Neo X Music listening mode creates 9 channel surround sound from 2 channel stereo sources With this setting you can specify by how much the front left and right channel output is attenuated in order to create the center channel Changing the value from 0 to 5 will spread the sound of the center channel to left and right outwards 5 Audyssey DSX E Soundstage gt 3dB to Reference to 3dB With this setting you can adjust the sound stage when using Audyssey DSX Note This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied The center speaker is connected Either the front high or front wide speakers are connected Powered Zone 2 is not in use Theater Dimensional B Listening Angle Wide Select if the listening angle is greater than 30 degrees gt Narrow Select if the listening angle is less than 30
297. xiliary input of your TV to the speakers of the AV receiver A connection such as an optical digital cable or similar is required in addition to the HDMI cable Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the remote controller of the TV Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for the AV receiver can be performed from the remote controller of the TV E For RIHD compatible players recorders The following linked operations are enabled by connecting the AV receiver to an RIFLD compatible player recorder When playback is started on the player recorder AV receiver will switch to the HDMI input of the player recorder that is playing back Operation of the player recorder is possible using the remote controller supplied with the AV receiver Depending on the model used not all operations may be available Ly To be continued 5 E How to connect and setup 1 Confirm the connection and settings 1 Connect the HDMI OUT MAIN jack to the HDMI input jack of the TV Blu ray Disc DVD player etc um HDMI connection AV receiver EI DIGITAL AUDIO 1 connection connection OPTICAL TV projector etc 2 Connect the audio output from the TV to the OPTICAL IN 2 jack of the AV receiver using an optical digital cable Note When the audio return channel ARC function is used with an ARC capable TV this connection is not necessa
298. y 255 255 255 0 50 B Gateway Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP E DNS Server Enter the DNS server address provided by your ISP E Proxy URL To use a Web proxy enter its URL here E Proxy Port If you re using a Web proxy enter a proxy port number here Bi Network Standby On gt Off This setting enables or disables control over the network When enabled the NET indicator will be dimly lit while the AV receiver is in standby mode Note that the indicator may not light under certain conditions gt page 59 Note When set to On the power consumption slightly increases in standby mode E Update Notice gt Enable Disable When this setting is enabled you will be notified if a firmware update via network is available Note Selecting Never Remind me on the notification window will switch this setting to Disable gt page 23 For details on the update notification see If the Firmware Update Available window appears gt page 23 Initial Setup If you skipped the initial setup wizard for example on first time use you can reaccess it from here See Initial Setup page 24 Remote Controller Setup 1 2 HOME 4 amp su LLC Remote Controller Setup Remote ID E Remote ID 1 2 0r3 When several Onkyo components are used in the same room their remote ID codes may overlap To differentiate the AV receiver from other components you
299. y Speaker Setup default a screen saver automatically comes on Speaker Configuration Tip RECEIVER The time until the screen saver activates itself can be changed 9 8 Subwoofer in the Screen Saver setting page 79 gt Ich The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is Audio signal is outputted from SW1 jack ENTER operated only avia WR gt 2ch e E Audio signal is outputted from SW1 and HOME CD Main Menu 2 Sub Menu Setting target Press RECEIVER followed by HOME 9 Setting options default setting underlined Use lt gt to select Setup and then press ENTER Use A V to select a main menu item and then press LL ENTER Pi Use A V to select a sub menu item and then press ENTER Q1 A Use A V to select a setting target and use lt gt to change the setting Press HOME to close the menu Sub Menu Press RETURN to return to the previous menu Main Menu Note This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by using SETUP the cursor and enter middle buttons During Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup messages etc that are displayed on the TV screen will appear on the AV receiver s display A Enss V An O About the HYBRID STANDBY Indicator By way of optimized circuitry this function reduces power consumption when the AV receiver is in standby mode The HYBRID STANDBY indicator will light in ei
300. y luego pulse ENTER o gt para iniciar la reproducci n de la emisora Aparecer la pantalla de reproducci n 6 Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a distancia Botones activados B BB W gt gt Bi Elementos del menu Rate Song as Favorite Guarda informaci n en el servidor haciendo que sea m s probable que la canci n se vuelva a reproducir Ban Song Guarda informaci n en el servidor haciendo que sea menos probable que la canci n se vuelva a reproducir Ban Artist Guarda informaci n en el servidor haciendo que sea menos probable que las canciones de este artista se vuelvan a reproducir Mark Favorite A ade la emisora que se est reproduciendo actualmente a los favoritos Unmark Favorite Elimina la emisora que se est reproduciendo actualmente de los favoritos Add song to Library A ade la canci n que se est reproduciendo actualmente a su biblioteca Delete song from Library Elimina la canci n que se est reproduciendo actualmente de la biblioteca Add to My Favorites A ade una emisora o canci n a la lista Mis favoritos Ess Y Uso de Internet Radio Y1203 2 C Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound amp Vision Corporation Japan All rights reserved 294011898B ONKYO Using Internet Radio Common Procedures in Internet Radio Menu Note Available services may vary depending on the region 1 Press NET A list of the network
301. y to cycle through the available information HD Radio Station name channel number Indicates HD Radio reception Scrolling title artist Station name amp HD Radio channel number HD channel Artist name and Song title are displayed in the 2nd line if the AV receiver has a two line display Frequency Listening mode Frequency amp Listening mode Scrolling station information Station information Scrolling artist name Artist information T Scrolling song title Song title information Note The exact information displayed depends on your AV receiver This information is displayed only when receiving HD Radio A En 36 Y Turning On 8 Basic Operations Using RDS excluding North American models RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are available When tuned into an RDS station the RDS indicator lights When the station is broadcasting text information the text can be displayed E What is RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of transmitting data in FM radio signals It was developed by the European Broadcasting Union EBU and is available in most European countries Many FM stations use it these days In addition to displaying text information RDS can also help you find radio stations by type e g news sport rock etc The AV receiver supports four types of RDS information PS Program Service When tuned to
302. yboard screen or in Web Setup If you don t know your username or password call Sirius XM at 888 539 7474 for assistance Tip If you want to use multiple user accounts see Using Multiple Accounts gt page 1 Login can be made from the Users screen B Using the keyboard screen 1 Use A V lt and ENTER to enter your user name and password 2 Select OK 3 Press ENTER The Confirm your entries screen appears 4 Press ENTER Please wait appears and then SiriusXM Internet Radio screen appears which displays the category available for selection 2 Use A V to select the category and then press ENTER The channel list screen for the selected category appears 3 Use A F to select the desired channel and then press ENTER The playback screen for the selected channel appears and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet Radio You can control the tracks with the buttons on the remote control Enabled buttons Bl EE a lt gt gt E Menu Items Add to My Favorites Adds a channel to My Favorites list En4 V Using Internet Radio Siriusxm INTERNET RADIO SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold separately and are governed by the Sirius Terms and Conditions see www sirius com Be sure to read this agreement before you purchase your subscription Sirius XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries All rights res
303. ynamic Volume and Dolby Volume have no effect in THX listening mode Note This setting is fixed at Yes if Loudness Plus is set to On E Metadata Compatible gt On When Metadata Compatible is set to On valid metadata is transmitted via the HDMI connections and can be used by other devices in the system gt Off When Metadata Compatible is set to Off metadata is not transmitted via the HDMI connections The HDMI connection in your system is used to deliver uncompressed digital audio and video information from one device to the next There is also additional information about this digital content that can be delivered Such additional information is referred to as metadata Metadata Compatible mode should be used when there are home theater components in your system such as Blu ray disc players set top boxes and displays that use this additional metadata For example Metadata Compatible mode should be set to ON when there are THX Media Director Enabled devices in the system This ensures that this additional information can be received by your Onkyo AVR and can be sent to other devices that are connected in your home theater system with no interruption THX Loudness Plus THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus and THX Select2 Plus Certified receivers With THX Loudness Plus home theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a surrou

ONKYO TX-NR1010

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents